HP C160 Owner's Manual
Model C160 / C180 / C200 / C240 / C360 Owner â s Guide HP Part No. A4200-90050 Edition E1298 Printed in U.S.A.
Copyright  Hewlett-Packard Co. 1998 Printing History First Printing: December 1998 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. NOTICE The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. HEWLETT -P ACKARD W ARRANTY ST A TEMENT HP PRODUCT DURA TION OF W ARRANTY C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 one year 1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period speciï¬ed above. If HP receive notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like-new . 2. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period speciï¬ed above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. 3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninter- rupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. 4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in per- formance or may have been subject to incidental use.
iii 5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of instal- lation if installed by HP . If customer schedules installation or causes instal- lation by HP to be delayed more than 30 days after delivery , warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery . 6. W arranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inade- quate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP , (c) unauthorized modiï¬cation or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental speciï¬cations for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. 7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LA W , THE ABOVE W AR- RANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER W ARRANTY OR CON- DITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALL Y DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED W AR- RANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY , SA TISF AC- TOR Y QUALITY , AND FITNESS FOR A P AR TICULAR PURPOSE. 8. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the sub- ject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product. 9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LA W , THE REMEDIES IN THIS W ARRANTY ST A TEMENT ARE CUSTOMER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICA TED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DA T A OR FOR DIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DA T A), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT , TOR T , OR OTHER WISE. FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND: THE W ARRANTY TERMS CONT AINED IN THIS ST A TE- MENT , EXCEPT T O THE EXTENT LA WFULL Y PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDA TOR Y ST A TUTOR Y RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copy- right. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written con- sent of Hewlett-Packard Company . RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication, or disclosure by gov- ernment is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in T echnical Data and Computer Software Clause at DF ARS 252.227.7013. Hewlett-Packard Co., 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contents v Preface xiii Audience xiv Safety and Regulatory Statements xiv Release Document(s) xiv Related Manuals xv Revision History xv Documentation Conventions xvi Problems, Questions, and Suggestions xvii 1 Product Information Product Description 3 System Unit Front Panel Controls 5 System Power Switch 5 Power LED 6 System LEDs 6 Audio Controls 7 Storage Device Controls and Features 8 CD-ROM Drive 8 DDS T ape Drive 10 Floppy Disk Drive 12 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 13 Pullout Card 14 Security Loop 14 Audio Connectors 15 PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Connectors 17 HP Parallel I/O Connector 17 802.3 Network Connectors 17 Serial Input/Output Connectors 18
vi Contents SCSI Connectors 19 TOC Button 19 Power Cord Connector 19 Monitors 20 Keyboard 21 Pointing Devices 21 Operating System Overview 22 2 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions 25 CD-ROM Drive 25 Controls and Features 26 CD-ROM Media 28 Caring for CD-ROM Discs 28 Operating the CD-ROM Drive 29 Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM in the Disc T ray 29 Disc T ray Description 29 Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 30 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 31 Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a V ertically Mounted Drive 32 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a V ertically Mounted Drive 34 V erifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation 35 Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 36 Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 36 Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 38 Reading the Busy Light 39 T roubleshooting 41
Contents vii 3 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions 45 DDS Drive 45 Storage Capacities 45 Controls and Indicators 46 LEDs 47 LED W arning Conditions 48 Data Cassettes 49 Media Life 49 Cleaning the T ape Heads 50 Media Restrictions 50 Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Data Cassette 51 Operating the DDS T ape Drive 52 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 52 V erifying the DDS T ape Drive Operation 53 Using Device Files 54 Archiving Data 55 W riting to a Data Cassette 55 Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Y our System 56 Listing the Files on a Data Cassette 56 Further Command Information 57 T roubleshooting 58 Ordering Information 58 4 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette 61 Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Diskette 61 Inserting and Removing a Diskette 62 Operating the Floppy Drive 63 V erifying the Floppy Drive Conï¬guration 63
viii Contents Using Device Files 64 Formatting a New Diskette 65 T ransferring Data T o and From a Floppy Diskette 66 Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette 66 Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Y our System 66 Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette 67 For More Information 68 Conï¬guring the Floppy Driver 69 T roubleshooting 70 Ordering Information 70 5 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions 73 Problems with Powering Up the System 73 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System 74 Problems with the 802.3 Network 75 Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive 76 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive 77 Problems Using the DDS T ape Drive 78 Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive 79 LED Error Codes 80 Dealing with a Boot Failure 83 Running System V eriï¬cation T ests 84 A Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 1 89 Declaration of Conformity 2 90
Contents ix Special V ideo Conï¬guration Statements 91 For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: 91 For FCC Applications: 91 Emissions Regulations 92 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 92 VCCI Class B ITE (Japan) 93 Korea RRL (EMI Class A) 93 Emissions Regulations Compliance 93 Acoustics 94 Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV 94 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions 94 Safety Statement 95 Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) 96 V isible LEDs 96 W arnings and Cautions 97 B Changing Y our W orkstationâs Hardwar e Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs 101 Preparing Y our W orkstation 103 Installing Storage Devices 105 Preparing to Install Y our Storage Device 106 Conï¬guring your Storage Device 106 Determining Y our Storage Devices Position 106 Storage Device Cable Routing 108 Removing the Storage T ray 108 Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format T ape Drive 109 Installing a Floppy Drive 1 11
x Contents Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 1 13 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 3 or Position 4 1 15 Replacing the Storage T ray 118 Conï¬guring a Hard Disk Drive 120 Removing the Main T ray Assembly 122 Replacing the Main T ray Assembly 124 Installing Additional Memory 126 Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 130 Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 136 Graphics Adapter Considerations 137 Special V ideo Conï¬guration Statements 137 Graphics Paths 138 Graphics Conï¬guration Restrictions 139 Installing the Option Board 141 Replacing the Battery 146 Changing Y our Monitor T ype 148 Setting the Monitor T ype from the Boot Console Interface 148 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On 148 Changing the Console to External T erminal 149 C SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences 153 SCSI Restrictions 156 Cables 156 Connectors and T erminators 158 SCSI Conï¬guration Constraints 159 Narrow , Single-ended SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 159 Fast, W ide, Differential SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 160
Contents xi Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 160 Determining SCSI Bus Length 161 Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length 161 Fast, W ide Differential SCSI Bus Length 163 Ultra, W ide, Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length 165 Assigning SCSI Device IDs 167 Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs 168 Fast, W ide Differential SCSI IDs (C160/C180/C200 Upgrades) 170 Ultra, W ide SCSI IDs 171 Connecting to the SCSI Ports 172 System SCSI Port Connection 172 D The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features 177 Accessing the Boot Console Interface 182 Booting Y our W orkstation 183 Searching for Bootable Media 185 Resetting Y our W orkstation 186 Displaying and Setting Paths 187 Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype 189 The Monitor Command 189 Displaying the Current Monitor Conï¬guration 190 Setting the Monitor T ype 191 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On 193 Changing the Console to External T erminal 194 Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration 195 Memory Information Sample 1 196
xii Contents Memory Information Sample 2 197 Displaying the Status of the System I/O 198 Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags 199 Displaying and Setting the Security Mode 201 Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode 202 Displaying the LAN Station Address 203 Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings 204 Displaying System Information 206 Displaying PIM Information 207
xiii Preface This owner â s guide describes how to use your HP 9000 C Class workstation. This manual assumes that you have installed your workstation as described in the C Class Har dwar e Installation Car d.
xiv Audience This guide is intended for HP 9000 Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstation users. Safety and Regulatory Statements See Appendix A in the back of this manual for safety and regulatory state- ments that apply to this workstation. Release Document(s) Please refer to the Release Document(s) you received with your system or system software for additional information that we may not have been able to include in this guide at the time of its publication.
xv Related Manuals Refer to the following manuals for more information: ⢠C Class Har dwar e Installation Car d (A4200-90012) ⢠Using Your HP Workstation (A2615-90003) ⢠Installing and Updating HP-UX (B2355-90050) ⢠Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals (B2355-90053) ⢠HP Visual User Environment Userâs Guide (B1171-90079) ⢠Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers: Sharing the HP-UX File System (B2355-90038) T o order manuals, please contact your local sales ofï¬ce. Revision History The revision history for each edition of the manual is listed below: HP Part No. Edition Revision History A4200-90050 E1298 First printing
xvi Documentation Conventions Unless otherwise noted in the text, this guide uses the following symbolic conventions. user-supplied values Italic words or characters in for- mats and command descriptions represent values that you must supply . sample user input In examples, information that the user enters appears in color . output Information that the system dis- plays appears in this type- face . literal values Bold words or characters in for- mats and command descriptions represent commands or keywords that you must use literally . Path- names are also in bold. KEY T ext with a line above and a line below denotes a key on your key- board, or a key or button which is drawn on your workstationâ s graphic display . (In this manual we refer to the Enter key . On your keyboard the key may be labeled either Enter or Return.)
xvii Pr oblems, Questions, and Suggestions If you have any problems, questions, or suggestions with our hardware, soft- ware, or documentation, please call 1-800-633-3600 (US & Canada) or con- tact the HP Response Center for your country .
xviii
1 1 Product Information
2 Product Information This chapter introduces the HP 9000 Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations, including their controls and indicators. This chapter discusses the following topics: ⢠Product description ⢠System unit front panel controls ⢠System unit rear panel connectors ⢠Monitors ⢠Keyboards ⢠Operating system overview
3 Product Information Product Description Product Description The Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations contain the follow- ing key features: ⢠Processor Performance 160 MHz (Model C160) 180 MHz (Model C180) 200 MHz (Model C200) 236 MHz (Model C240) 367 MHz (Model C360) ⢠Operating System: Native HP-UX HP-UX 10.20 (Model C160) HP-UX 10.20 (Model C180) HP-UX 10.20 with Additional Core Enhancements (ACE 9707) (Models C200 /C240 ) HP-UX 10.20 with ACE 9806 and IPR 9812 (Model C360) ⢠User Interface HP VUE version 3.0 graphical user interface HP CDE graphical user interface ⢠Compatibility Source and binary code compatible with the Series 700 product family ⢠Optional Graphics Fast 2D color graphics; choice of 1 to 4 displays HP VISUALIZE-8/24 - Accelerated 8-plane or 24-plane 3D graphics HP VISUALIZE-48 - 24/24 image planes, 8 overlay planes, 24-bit Z buffer 3D graphics HP VISUALIZE-48XP - Advanced, 24/24 image planes, 8 overlay planes, 24-bit Z buffer 3D graphics HP VISUALIZE-EG, FX2, FX4, FX6 - Advanced graphics ⢠Memory 32 MB to 1.5 GB main memory in pairs of 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB or 128 MB modules Six pairs maximum
4 Product Information Product Description ⢠Internal Storage Devices Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Hard Disk Drives (C160/C180) or Ultra, Wide Single-Ended (C200 /C240/C360) 1-inch Low Profile Drive (up to two) 1.6-inch Full Height Drive (one) Single-Ended SCSI Removable Media CD-ROM Drive or 2.0/4.0 GB, 4-mm DDS Tape Drive 4/8 GB, DDS2 DAT Drive (C200 /C240/C360) 12/24 GB, DDS3 DAT Drive (C200 /C240/C360) 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (not a SCSI Device) ⢠Standard Network Ethernet IEEE 802.3 AUI RJ45, UTP Twisted Pair 10Base-T, 100Base-T (C200 /C240/C360 only) ⢠Standard I/O One Single-Ended, 8-bit , 5 MB/sec synchronous, 1.5 MB/sec asynchronous ALT-1, 50-pin, high density SCSI connector One Fast, Wide (for hard disk drives) 20 MB/sec synchronous 68-pin, high- density SCSI connector (C160/C180) One Ultra, Wide, Single-Ended SCSI connector (C200 /C240/C360) Two Serial Interfaces RS232C, 9-pin male One Parallel Interface, Centronics, BUSY handshake, 25-pin female 16 Bit Audio Line-in and Line-out connectors Two PS/2 ports (keyboard and mouse) One HP-HIL connector (C160/C180 only) ⢠EISA/GSC 4 slots total: 1 GSC/PCI, 1 GSC/EISA/PCI and 2 GSC/EISA (C160/180) 4 slots total: 3 GSC/PCI, 1 GSC/EISA/PCI (C200 /C240/C360) ⢠Keyboards PS/2 Keyboard (mouse) or ITF Keyboard (also known as HP HIL) (HP HIL mouse)(C160/C180 only)
5 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls System Unit Front Panel Controls Figure 1 shows the location of the system unit front panel controls. Figure 1 System Unit Front Panel Controls System Power Switch Use the power switch to power the system unit on and off. NOTICE: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . NOTICE: The C200 /C240/C360 when turned off and plugged in will draw 30 watts of power and the cooling fan may turn on. Storage Devices Power Switch Power LED System LEDs Removable Volume Mute Headset Mic
6 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Power LED The power LED is located on the left side of the front panel on the disk tray . It lights when the system unit power is on and ï¬ashes until the OS is booted. Once the OS is booted, the LED remains on without ï¬ashing, indicating that a soft shutdown is enabled. System LEDs The Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations have four diagnostic LEDs located next to the system power LED. For more information on the error codes displayed by the diagnostic LEDs, see âLED Error Codesâ in the chapter , âSolving Problemsâ. LED 4 - System Heartbeat LED 3 - SCSI Bus Activity LED 2 - Network T ransmit LED 1 - Network Receive
7 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Audio Controls Next to the system LEDs are the following audio controls: The volume control, headset jack, and microphone jack features of the CD- ROM are supported through applications only . For more information on the features and electrical speciï¬cations, see the section titled âSecurity Loop,â later in this chapter . Headset Jack Accommodates mini-head- phones with a 3.5 mm diameter miniature stereo plug. V olume Control Adjusts the audio output volume to the headset or lineout. Mic Jack Accommodates microphones with a 3.5 mm diameter minia- ture stereo plug. Mute Button T urns off the audio output to line out and speaker only .
8 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Storage Device Controls and Features The Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations allow up to two of the following internal storage devices: CD-ROM drive, DDS tape drive, or ï¬oppy drive. The following sections describe the controls and features of these devices. NOTICES: Y ou may not have two of the same type of device. For example, you can have a CD-ROM device and a ï¬oppy device, but not two CD-ROMs. Due to space limitations, a DDS-format tape drive and a CD-ROM drive cannot both be mounted in the system at the same time. CD-ROM Drive Figure 2 shows the operating controls and features of the CD-ROM drive, and T able 1 describes them. Figure 2 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features Headphone Jack V olume Control Busy Eject Button Indicator Emergency Eject Disk T ray
9 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls T able 1 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Featur es Control/Featur e Purpose Busy Indicator Lights during a data access oper- ation and blinks during a data transfer . The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit when there is one of the following: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) ⢠No disc present Eject Button Press to open the disc tray and insert or remove a disc. When the drive is in use, press the eject button for more than one second to open the disc tray . Emergency Eject Remove the Phillips-type screw and insert the end of a paper clip to open the disc tray when the workstation does not have power . Disc T ray Holds the CD-ROM disc. This type of CD-ROM drive does not use a disc caddy . The disc tray does not open if the workstation power is off. Headphone Jack Used to connect headphones with a 1/8-inch connector . V olume Control V olume control for the head- phone jack.
10 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls DDS T ape Drive Y our DDS tape drive is either a DDS-DC (early or later model) or a DDS-2 tape drive with a 3.5-inch form factor , data compression, and a single-ended SCSI interface. Both drives incorporate data compression capability and are high-capacity , high transfer-rate devices for data storage on tape. W ith com- pression, the DDS-DC drives can store up to 4 GB of data on a 90 meter tape and the DDS-2 drive can store up to 8 GB of data on a 120 meter tape. Figure 3, Figure 4, and Figure 5 show the LEDs, and eject button of the DDS-format tape drives. Figure 3 DDS-DC (Early Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 4 DDS-DC (Later Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Cassette LED Drive LED Eject Button T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean DCLZ
11 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Figure 5 DDS-2 Drive Controls and Indicators T able 2 DDS T ape Drive Contr ols and Features Control/Featur e Purpose Eject Button Push the eject button to remove tape cassettes from the drive. Drive LEDs The DDS drive LEDs light and ï¬ash to indicate drive status and error con- ditions. T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean
12 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Floppy Disk Drive Figure 6 shows the operating controls and features of the ï¬oppy drive, and T able 3 describes them. Figure 6 Floppy Drive Controls and Features T able 3 Floppy Drive Controls and Featur es Control/Featur e Purpose Eject Button Push the eject button to remove ï¬oppy diskettes from the drive. Drive LED The ï¬oppy drive LED ï¬ashes to indicate the drive is in use. Eject Button Drive LED
13 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors System Unit Rear Panel Connectors This section describes the following connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel: ⢠Security loop ⢠Audio connectors ⢠Keyboard and mouse connectors ⢠HP parallel (Centronics) I/O connector ⢠802.3 network connectors ⢠Serial I/O connectors ⢠SCSI connectors (including Ultra or Fast, Wide SCSI and single-ended SCSI) ⢠TOC (Transfer of Control) button ⢠Power cord connector NOTICE: T o maintain emissions compliance, verify that all cables are fully seated and properly fastened. Figure 7 shows the locations of the connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel.
14 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Figure 7 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Pullout Card The pullout card contains serial and model number information along with regulatory agency information. Security Loop The security loop provides a means of locking the storage tray with a pad- lock or other locking device, to prevent unauthorized removal from the sys- tem. Audio Line In PS/2 Mouse PS/2 Keyboard HP Parallel LAN-AUI LAN-TP Serial 1 Serial 2 Single-Ended SCSI Fast, Wide SCSI Audio Line Out Power Security Loop TOC Monitor (C160/C180) Pullout Card Monitor (C180, C200) (Ultra Wide Single-Ended C200/C240/C360)
15 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Audio Connectors The Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations have audio input and output capability through external input and output connectors on the rear panel and through an internal speaker . The rear panel contains the Line IN (Stereo line-in) and Line OUT (Stereo line-out) connectors. NOTICE: T o maintain compliance with FCC/CISPR B you must use fully shielded, unbalanced audio cables and plugs. The audio connectors are standard stereo audio mini-jacks. Hewlett-Packard recommends using gold-plated plugs available through audio retailers. The following summarizes the capabilities of the Model C160/C180/C200/C240/ C360 workstations: ⢠Audio Features Programmable sample rates: 8kHz, 16kHz, 32kHz, 48kHz, 1 1.025kHz, 22.05kHz, and 44.1kHz. Programmable output attenuation: 0 to -96dB in -1.5dB steps Programmable input gain: 0 to 22.5dB in 1.5dB steps. Input monitoring: 16-bit linear , 8-bit u-law , or A-law coding ⢠Audio Inputs Line-in Mono microphone compatible with 1.5V phantom supply (bias voltage sup- plied by the system) CD-ROM audio (if internal CD-ROM is installed) ⢠Audio Outputs Line-out Headset
16 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Built-in mono speaker ⢠Audio CODEC Crystal CS4215 T able 4 summarizes the audio electrical speciï¬cations for the Model C160/ C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations. T able 4 Audio Electrical Speciï¬cations Frequency Response 25-20,000Hz Input Sensitivity/Impedance Line Out 2.0Vpk/47k ohm Microphone 22mVpk/1k ohm Max Output Level/Impedance Line Out 2.8Vpp/47k ohm Headphone 2.75Vpp/50 ohm Speaker 5.88Vpp/48 ohm Output Impedance Line Out 619 ohm Headphone 1 18 ohm Signal to Noise Line Out 65 dB Headphone 61 dB Speaker 63 dB Line In 61 dB Microphone 57 dB THD (w nominal load) Line Out -73 dB Headphone -70 dB Speaker -68 dB Line In -75 dB Microphone -73 dB T o convert from dB to number of signiï¬cant bits, use the formula: n= dB/20 log10 = dB/6. For example, for 61dB S/N then n=61/6 10 signiï¬cant bits, or in other words, about 6 bits of noise.
17 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Connectors The PS/2 connectors provide an interface to the system for the keyboard, mouse, and a variety of other pointing devices, such as trackballs. Consult the documentation that accompanies each input device for speciï¬c informa- tion concerning its use. HP Parallel I/O Connector The 25-pin HP Parallel I/O interface uses Centronics interface protocols to support peripheral devices such as printers and plotters. Consult the docu- mentation that accompanies each peripheral device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. 802.3 Network Connectors The Model C160 and C180 workstations have built-in ThickNet LAN-AUI and LAN-TP (T wisted Pair) connectors for the 802.3 (ETHERNET) net- work. Connections to ThinLAN networks require an external transceiver . The workstation automatically selects the correct network setting. The Model C200 /C240/C360 workstations have built-in ThickNet LAN-AUI and 100Base-T and 10Base-T connectors for the 802.3 (ETHERNET) network. Connec- tions to ThinLAN networks require an external transceiver . The workstation auto- matically selects the correct network setting.
18 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Serial Input/Output Connectors There are a variety of pointing devices (mouse or trackball) or peripheral devices that can attach to the Serial Input/Output (SIO) ports on the worksta- tion. Peripheral devices include printers, plotters, modems, and scanners. Consult the documentation that accompanies each peripheral device for spe- ciï¬c information concerning its use. The SIO ports are programmable, allowing functions such as bit rate, char- acter length, parity , and stop bits to be set. The SIO Ports are used as inter- faces for serial asynchronous devices to the CPU. The ports operate at up to a 460.8 K baud rate. T able 5 shows the SIO connector pin listings. The serial connectors are 9-pin D-sub connectors. Signal names are those speciï¬ed in the EIA RS-232 stan- dard. T able 5 Serial I/O Pins Pin No. Signal Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 2 RXD Receive Data 3 TXD T ransmit Data 4 DTR Data T erminal Ready 5 GND Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 R TS Request T o Send 8 CTS Clear T o Send 9 RI Ring Indicator
19 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors SCSI Connectors Use the SCSI connectors to connect external SCSI devices such as DDS-for- mat tape drives and CD-ROM drives. Consult the documentation that accompanies each SCSI device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. Refer to Appendix C of this manual for information about connecting SCSI devices to your workstation. NOTICE: There must AL W A YS be a terminator at both ends of a SCSI bus. This means one internal terminator and one external terminator . The Fast-Wide Differential SCSI, Ultra-wide, Single-Ended SCSI and Narrow Single- Ended SCSI connectors must have a terminator connected when no external device is connected. Note that the fast, wide differential terminators, ultra-wide, single-ended terminators and the narrow single- ended terminators are different and not interchangeable. W ARNING: The C200/C240/C360 workstations have an Ultra Wide-SE SCSI interface in place of the Fast-Wide SCSI interface. These interfaces are not compatible. Connecting a Fast-Wide device to an Ultra Wide-SE interface will not work and may damage the device. Be sure to connect only Fast-Wide devices to a Fast- Wide interface and Ultra Wide-SE devices to an Ultra Wide-SE interface. TOC Button The TOC button resets the system and transfers control from the default device to an auxiliary device. Power Cord Connector Plug the workstationâ s power cord into the power cord connector to provide ac power to the system.
20 Product Information Monitors Monitors The Model C160/C180 workstations have a graphics controller built-in on the I/O board. The Model C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations have a high- performance graphics card installed in an option slot. The following HP monitors are supported: ⢠17-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4330) ⢠20-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4331) Before using your monitor you should become familiar with its controls, connectors, and indicators. For this information, consult the documentation that was packaged with your monitor . The built-in monitor connector is a new Enhanced V ideo connector . An EVC to DB adapter (HP Part No. 8120-6861), included with your system, is required to use monitors that have DB-15 type connectors.
21 Product Information Keyboard Keyboard The C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 systems use a PS/2 keyboard which con- nects to the PS/2 interface connector on the rear of your workstation. Pointing Devices The PS/2 connector , the HIL port, or the Serial ports support using an HP three-button mouse, a trackball, or other options as pointing devices. For instructions on using a particular device, see the manual that accompanies the device. For general information on using three-button mice and on the various cur- sor shapes associated with different areas of HP VUE while using a mouse, see Using Y our HP W orkstation .
22 Product Information Operating System Overview Operating System Overview The Model C160/C180 workstations use version 10.20 or later of the HP-UX operating system. The Model C200/C240 workstations require the W orkstation Additional Core Enhancements (ACE 9707) for HP-UX 10.20. The Model C360 workstations require the W orkstation Additional Core Enhancements (ACE 9806) for HP-UX 10.20 and the IPR 9812 software. Instant Ignition systems (systems with preloaded software) have X-windows and the Hewlett-Packard HP VUE 3.0 graphical user interface installed and conï¬gured. Refer to Using Y our HP W orkstation for more information on Instant Igni- tion.
23 2 Using Your CD-ROM Drive
24 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive This chapter describes how to use your CD-ROM drive. It is divided into the following sections: ⢠CD-ROM drive and CD-ROM media descriptions ⢠Operating the CD-ROM Drive ⢠Mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc ⢠Troubleshooting NOTICE Be sure you read and understand the information on mounting and unmounting CD-ROM discs before you begin using your CD-ROM disc drive. This chapter provides an overview of the optional CD-ROM drive and media, and describes how to use the CD-ROM drive. W e assume the CD- ROM drive is set to the factory default address of SCSI ID 2. NOTICE Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot. If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator .
25 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions This section describes basic information needed for using the CD-ROM drive and CD-ROM discs. CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive is a random access read-only mass storage device that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive supports the ISO 9660 and High Sierra format standards. Y ou can access information from the drive like any other disk drive, except that you cannot write to the drive. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for reading data optically , and includes an embedded controller with a SCSI interface.
26 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions Controls and Features Figure 8 shows and T able 6 describes the operating controls and features of the CD-ROM drives. Figure 8 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features Jack Headset V olume Control Thumbwheel Busy Indicator Eject Button Emergency Eject Hole
27 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions NOTICE The V olume Control, Headset Jack, and Audio Jack features of the CD- ROM drive are supported through applications only . T able 6 CD-ROM Drive Operating Controls and Featur es Control/Featur e Purpose Headset Jack Y ou can plug mini-headphones with a 3.5-mm diameter miniature stereo plug into this jack. V olume Control Use the volume control to adjust the audio output volume to the headset jack. Busy Indicator The Busy Indicator lights during a data access operation and blinks during a data transfer . The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit when there is one of the following: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) ⢠No disc present Eject Button Press the Eject Button to open the Disc T ray and insert or remove a disc. When the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to open the Disc T ray . Emergency Eject By inserting the end of a paper clip, you can open the Disc T ray when the workstation does not have power .
28 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions CD-ROM Media CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 in.) in diameter , and use one data surface with a capacity of approximately 600 megabytes. The data surface contains pits and ï¬at spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. Y ou may access ï¬les and data stored on a CD-ROM disc, but you may not write ï¬les or data to a CD-ROM disc. CD-ROM data discs are identical to audio compact discs (CDs) except that they store computer data and information. CAUTION: Handle CD-ROM discs by the edges only . Always be sure a CD-ROM disc is either in the CD-ROM drive or its protective case when not in use. This will lessen the chance of exposing the disc surface to dust. Over time, dust reduces the reliability of the read head in the CD-ROM drive. Caring for CD-ROM Discs Observe the following guidelines to help prevent data loss and prolong the life of your CD-ROM discs and drive: ⢠Use CD-ROM discs in a clean environment to prevent dust particles from scratching disc surfaces. ⢠Store CD-ROM discs in a cool, dry place to prevent moisture and heat damage. ⢠Donât try to clean the surface of a CD-ROM disc with cleaning solvents, as some cleaning solvents may damage the disc. NOTICE: Y ou must mount the disc after loading it into the drive. Refer to the section âMounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc,â later in this chapter , for instructions about mounting a disc.
29 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your CD-ROM drive. Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM in the Disc Tray This subsection describes how to load or unload a CD-ROM disc in the CD- ROM drive. Disc Tray Description This CD-ROM is designed to be used in either the horizontal or vertical position, depending on whether your system unit is horizontal or vertical (in the ï¬oor stand). The disc tray has four spring-loaded disc holders that hold the disc in place when the CD-ROM drive is in the vertical position. When the drive is in the horizontal position, the disc holders are not used and are held out of the way by four disc holder retainers. Figure 9 shows the CD- ROM disc tray , and disc holders. Figure 9 CD-ROM Disc Tray Disc Holder Disc Holder Disc Holder
30 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive This CD-ROM drive has an automatic loading/ejecting feature. T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: Figure 10 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 1 Check that the workstation is powered on. 2 To open the disc tray, press and release the load/eject button on the CD-ROM drive. 3 Be sure the disc holders are held away from the disc by the disc holder retainers. 4 Hold the disc by the edges with the label side up and place it in the disc tray as shown in Figure 10. 5 To close the disc tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
31 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive Perform the following steps to unload a disc from the CD-ROM drive: Figure 11 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Horizontally Mounted Drive 1 Press the eject button to eject the disc tray from the drive. If the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to eject the disc tray. NOTICE: Y ou must unmount the disc before you eject it from the drive. Refer to the subsection, âUnmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM,â for instructions on unmounting a disc. 2 Wait until the drive has fully ejected the disc tray. Be sure the disc holders are held away from the disc by the disc holder retainers, Then remove the disc from the tray as shown in Figure 11. Be careful to touch only the edges of the disc. 3 To close the Disc Tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
32 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: Figure 12 Releasing the Disc Holder Retainers 1 Make sure the four disc holders are disengaged from the disc holder retainers, as shown in Figure 12. Disc Holder A Disc Holder C Disc Holder B Disc Holder D
33 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive 2 Hold the disc with the label side away from the tray and place the edge of the disc onto disc holders A and B as shown in Figure 13. Figure 13 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive 3 Press down gently against the spring tension of disc holders A and B, and swing the top of the disc in until it is held by disc holders C and D. 4 To close the disc tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
34 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive Perform the following steps to unload a disc from the CD-ROM drive: Figure 14 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Vertically Mounted Drive 1 Press the eject button to eject the disc tray from the drive. If the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to eject the disc tray. NOTICE: Y ou must unmount the disc before you eject it from the drive. Refer to the subsection, âUnmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM,â for instruction on unmounting a disc. 2 Press down gently against the spring tension of disc holders A and B and swing the top of the disc away from disc holders C and D as shown in Figure 14. 3 Remove the disc from disc holders A and B. 4 To close the Disc Tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
35 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Verifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: /usr/sbin/ioscan -d sdisk RETURN After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/12 ext_bus GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/12.0 target 8/12.0.0 disk QUANTUM LPS1080WD 8/12.5 target 8/12.5.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/12.6 target 8/12.6.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.2 target 8/16/5.2.0 disk TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA 8/16/5.4 target 8/16/5.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST3600N 8/16/5.6 target 8/16/5.6.0 disk MICROP 2112 10 bc I/O Adapter 10/12 ext_bus GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 10/12.4 target 10/12.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST31200W If ioscan does not see your CD-ROM drive it returns the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 6, âSolving Problems.â
36 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc T o access information on a CD-ROM disc, you must ï¬rst mount the disc. This applies to ï¬le system information only . If you wish to load a music CD, for example, you would not need to mount the disc. Mounting a disc with ï¬le system information on it gives the disc a pathname that allows your workstation to communicate electronically with it. Y ou must unmount the CD-ROM disc before removing it from the drive. CAUTION: T o use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted ï¬le system, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc can cause a system error condition that can require rebooting the system. If your workstation is running HP VUE, follow these instructions to mount and unmount a CD-ROM disc as a ï¬le system. If youâre using something other than HP VUE, use the instructions for mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc that come with that product. For more information on conï¬g- uring your CD-ROM drive, see the System Administration T asks manual or online help. The procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as r oot , contact your system administrator . Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to mount a CD-ROM disc: 1 Log in as root. If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2 Load the CD-ROM disc into the disc tray and gently push the tray into the drive. 3 In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam RETURN
37 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 4 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices ->. 5 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems ->. 6 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. Disks that are unmounted will have the word âunusedâ in the Use column. 7 From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive 8 The Select a Disk to Add... window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the CD-ROM disc you want to mount. 9 Click on OK . 10 The Set Disk Usage and Options... window opens. Select File System and click on OK . 11 The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Mounting file system... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on OK. Now you can access the CD-ROM disc as you would any other mounted ï¬le system.
38 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to unmount a CD-ROM disc: NOTICE: Before you unmount a CD-ROM disc, make sure that your working directory (the directory in which a relative path name search begins) is set to some directory other than the one under which the disc was mounted. CAUTION: If you wish to use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted ï¬le system, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc may cause a system error condition that may require rebooting the system. 1 Log in as root. If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam RETURN 3 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices ->. 4 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems ->. 5 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks. The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. 6 Highlight the disc you want to unmount and click on Remove a Hard Disk Drive from the Actions menu.
39 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 7 A window with the following message opens: Do you want to remove the disk? Click on Y es . 8 Press the eject button on the CD-ROM drive and remove the CD-ROM disc from the disc tray . Reading the Busy Light The CD-ROM busy light shows the status of the drive during the self test and during activity with the host system. The CD-ROM drive performs the self test when one of the following hap- pens: ⢠Y ou load a disc and close the Disc T ray . ⢠Y ou turn on the workstation with a disc already loaded in the CD-ROM drive. For the self test, the busy light operates in the following sequence: 1 Light On - The busy light goes on when the disc loads into the drive. 2 Light Flashing - The light ï¬ashes six times while a read test is per- formed on the disc. 3 Light Off - The light goes of f when the self test is complete.
40 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc The busy light stays on after the self test when one of the following condi- tions exist: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) ⢠No disc present The busy light goes off when one of the following conditions exist: ⢠A CD-ROM drive power failure exists. ⢠The drive is idle on the SCSI bus. The busy light ï¬ashes during normal activity with the system.
41 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your CD-ROM drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â
42 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive T roubleshooting
43 3 Using Your Digital Data Storage (DDS) Tape Drive
44 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive This chapter describes how to use the optional Digital Data Storage (DDS) tape drive. It also describes how to maintain and care for the drive. This chapter provides information on the following: ⢠DDS tape drive and data cassette descriptions ⢠Operating the DDS tape drive ⢠Ordering information CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled DDS (Digital Data Storage). Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
45 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions DDS Tape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions This section describes basic information needed for using your DDS tape drive and data cassettes. DDS Drive Y our DDS tape drive is either a DDS-DC (early or later model) or a DDS-2 tape drive with a 3.5-inch form factor , data compression, and a narrow sin- gle-ended SCSI interface. Both drives incorporate data compression capabil- ity and are high-capacity , high transfer-rate devices for data storage on tape. W ith compression, the DDS-DC drives can store up to 4 GB of data on a 90 meter tape and the DDS-2 drive can store up to 8 GB of data on a 120 meter tape. Storage Capacities The maximum storage capacities of different DDS drives with and without data compression are shown in the following tables; T able 7 DDS T ape Drive Capacities W ithout Data Compression T ape Length Full Height 5 1/4 DDS T ape Drive DDS-DC T ape Drives DDS-2 T ape Drive 60 meter 1.3 GB 1.3 GB 1.3 GB 90 meter Not Supported 2.0 GB 2.0 GB 120 meter Not Supported Not Supported 4.0 GB T able 8 DDS T ape Drive Capacities W ith Data Compression T ape Length Full Height 5 1/4 DDS T ape Drive DDS-DC T ape Drives DDS-2 T ape Drive 60 meter 2.6 GB 2.6 GB 2.6 GB 90 meter Not Supported 4.0 GB 4.0 GB 120 meter Not Supported Not Supported 8.0 GB
46 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Controls and Indicators Figure 15, Figure 16, and Figure 17 show the LEDs, and eject button of the DDS-format tape drives. Figure 15 DDS-DC (Early Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 16 DDS-DC (Later Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 17 DDS-2 Drive Controls and Indicators Cassette LED Drive LED Eject Button T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean DCLZ T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean
47 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions LEDs This section describes the LED codes that are displayed. The two LEDs on the front panels of the DDS drives indicate different activ- ities or problems that occur . Figure 18 lists the LED codes and their meanings for the DDS-DC early model drive. Figure 19 lists the LED codes and their meanings for the DDS- DC later model and DDS-2 drives. Figure 18 DDS-DC (Early Model) Tape Drive LED Display Codes OFF Green Amber Pulsing Green Pulsing Amber Pulsing Green and Amber Key Cassette Drive Meaning Read/Write States Write-Protect States Error States Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Media wear (caution) High humidity Self-test (normal) Self-test (failure)
48 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Figure 19 DDS-DC (Later Model) and DDS-2 Tape Drive LED Display Codes LED Warning Conditions The following sections describe actions to take if the LEDs indicate a warn- ing condition. High Humidity If the LEDs display the high humidity signal, the humidity is too high. The drive does not perform any operations until the humidity drops. Self-Test (Failure) If the LEDs display the self-test (failure) signal, a fault was diagnosed during the self tests. Note the pattern of the pulses and con- tact your local service representative. Media Wear (Caution) Hewlett-Packard DDS drives continually monitor the number of errors they have to correct when reading and writing to a tape to determine tape wear and tape head cleanliness. If excessive tape wear or dirty tape heads are suspected, the drive warns you by displaying the Media W ear (Caution) signal on the LED indicators. OFF Steady Green Steady Amber Flashing Green Pulsing Amber Fast Flash Green 1/4 sec on 1/4 sec off Key Tape Clean/ Meaning Activity â load or unload Activity â read or write Cartridge loaded Cleaning needed Attention Fault Any Any 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off
49 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions If the LED indicators on your DDS-format drive display the Media W ear (Caution) condition, follow this procedure: 1 Check the system console for any tape error messages. A hard error during a read or write operation may have occurred. 2 Clean the heads with a cleaning cassette (HP92283K) as described in âCleaning the T ape Heads,â later in this chapter . 3 Repeat the operation you performed when the Media W ear (Caution) signal dis- played. If the Media W ear (Caution) signal still displays, then the data cassette should be replaced. 4 If you are performing a backup from disk to tape, discard the data cassette and back up your ï¬les using a new data cassette. 5 If you are performing a restore from tape to disk, complete the restore, back up the ï¬les to a new data cassette, then discard the data cassette. Data Cassettes Media Life HP DDS data cassettes are currently speciï¬ed to 2000 passes over any part of the tape under optimal environmental conditions (50% relative humidity , 22 degrees C). During a tape operation, any one area of the tape may have multiple passes over the heads. This translates into approximately 200 to 300 backups or restores. Under certain conditions, the life of your data cassette is less. Replace your data cassettes after 100 backups or restores if your operating conditions meet any of the following criteria: ⢠The relative humidity in your operating environment is consistently less than 50%. ⢠Y ou know that the backup software you are using makes multiple passes over sec- tions of the tape during backups or restores. ⢠Y ou notice that when you do backups and restores the tape stops and starts fre- quently .
50 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Cleaning the Tape Heads Clean the heads of your tape drive after every 25 hours of tape drive use or if the Media W ear (Caution) signal is displayed on the LED. NOTICE: Only use HP Cleaning Cassettes (HP92283K) to clean the tape heads. Do not use swabs or other means of cleaning the tape heads. Follow this procedure to clean the tape heads: 1 Insert the cleaning cassette into the drive. The tape automatically loads the cas- sette and cleans the heads. At the end of the cleaning cycle, the drive ejects the cassette. 2 W rite the current date on the label on the cleaning cassette so that you know how many times you have used it. Discard the cleaning cassette after you have used it 25 times. Media Restrictions If you interchange media between other DDS-format tape drives, note that data cassettes with compressed data can only be read by tape drives that have data compression capabilities. This includes data cassettes that contain both compressed and noncompressed data.
51 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Data Cassette Y ou can only store or change information on a data cassette when the write- protect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the data cas- sette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Figure 20. Figure 20 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a DDS Tape T o protect information on a data cassette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 20. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for transferring data to a cassette. Push tab right for write. Push tab left for write-pr otect .
52 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Operating the DDS Tape Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your DDS tape drive. Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette Follow these steps to load and unload a data cassette from the DDS tape drive: 1 Insert the data cassette into the drive, as shown in Figure 21. Figure 21 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 2 Push the data cassette about three quarters of the way into the drive. The drive automatically pulls the data cassette the rest of the way in. When the LEDs on the front of the drive stop ï¬ashing, the drive has loaded the data cassette. 3 T o remove the data cassette, press and release the eject button on the front of the drive, as shown in Figure 21. The LEDs on the drive ï¬ash on and off. T en to twen- ty seconds later , the data cassette slides partway out of the drive. Remove the cas- sette from the drive. Eject Button
53 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Verifying the DDS Tape Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the DDS-format tape drive, enter the following: /usr/sbin/ioscan -d stape After a few moments the ioscan utility returns a message similar to the fol- lowing: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.3 target 8/16/5.3.0 tape HP HP35480A If ioscan does not see your tape drive, it will return the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 5, âSolving Problems.â
54 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Using Device Files Device ï¬les are special ï¬les that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a speciï¬c device, and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device ï¬les are available for use with your tape drive, use the following procedure: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Periph- eral Devices -> . 3 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Tape Drives -> . 4 The Tape Drives window opens. 5 In the list of tape drives, click on the desired tape drive to select it. 6 From the Actions menu, click on Show Device Files . A window opens with a list of the device ï¬les for the selected tape drive with an explanation of each one.
55 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Archiving Data This section describes how to transfer data to and from a DDS-format data cassette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command and your tape driveâ s device ï¬le. The tar command allows you to save ï¬les to a data cassette, restore ï¬les from a data cassette to your system, or list the ï¬les on your data cassette. Writing to a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to save ï¬les to a data cassette: 1 Check that the write-protect tab on the data cassette is in the write position. 2 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 3 In a terminal window , enter the following command line to write to the tape: tar -cvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to write to the tape. T o use the data compression mode, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as supporting compression.
56 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Your System Use the following instructions to restore ï¬les from a data cassette to your system: 1 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2 In a terminal window , use cd to change to the directory you want the ï¬les to reside in. 3 Enter the following command line to restore data: tar -xvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to restore from the tape. If pathname is not speciï¬ed, everything on the data cassette is restored. If the tape was made using data compression, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as supporting compression. Listing the Files on a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to list the ï¬les on a data cassette: 1 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command line to receive a ï¬le listing of the data cassette: tar -tvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam. If the tape was made with data compression, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as sup- porting compression.
57 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Further Command Information For additional information on using tar and a complete list of the command arguments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following: man tar The man utility looks up man pages on the system. Y ou may also communicate with the tape drive with the cpio, ftio, mt, and fbackup commands. For more information on these commands, enter the following in a terminal window: man command
58 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your DDS tape drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard data cassettes and cleaning cassettes for use in your DDS tape drive, use the following order numbers: ⢠HP92283A - Box of ï¬ve 60-meter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92283B - Box of ï¬ve 90-meter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92300A - Box of ï¬ve 120-meter DDS data cassettes (not supported on the DDS-DC drives) ⢠HP92283K - Package of two head-cleaning cassettes ⢠HP92283L - Lockable storage box for 12 cassettes CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled as DDS (Digital Data Storage) cassettes. Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
59 4 Using Your 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive
60 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive This chapter describes how to perform tasks that allow you to archive to or transfer data from the optional 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive. The information is organized into the following sections: ⢠Using the floppy diskette ⢠Operating the floppy drive ⢠Ordering information NOTICE: Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator .
61 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette Using the Floppy Diskette This section describes basic information needed for using your ï¬oppy dis- kettes. Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Diskette Y ou can only store or change information on a diskette when the write-pro- tect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the diskette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Fig- ure 22. Figure 22 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Floppy Diskette T o protect ï¬les on a diskette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 22. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for formatting a new diskette and transferring data to a diskette. Push tab up for write. Push tab down for write-pr otect.
62 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette Inserting and Removing a Diskette Follow these steps to insert and remove a diskette from the ï¬oppy disk drive: 1 Insert the diskette into the drive, as shown in Figure 23. Figure 23 Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 2 Push the diskette into the ï¬oppy drive until it clicks into place. 3 T o remove the diskette, push the eject button, as shown in Figure 23. Then re- move the diskette. Eject Button
63 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Operating the Floppy Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive. Verifying the Floppy Drive Configuration T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the ï¬oppy drive, use the ioscan command to see which devices are currently in use on your sys- tem. 1 In a terminal window , enter the following at the prompt: ioscan After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the I/O devices it could find. If there is a floppy drive in the list, that listing appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/0 graphics Graphics 8/16/10 pc Built-in Floppy Drive
64 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Using Device Files Device ï¬les are special ï¬les that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a speciï¬c device and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device ï¬les are available for use with your ï¬oppy drive, use the following procedure: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems-> . 3 The Disks and File Systems window opens. 4 In the list of drives, click on the floppy drive listing to select it. 5 From the Actions menu, click on View More Information . A window opens with a list of information for the ï¬oppy drive, including the device ï¬les. Identify your ï¬oppy device ï¬le number and use it in the following steps.
65 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Formatting a New Diskette Y ou must always format a new ï¬oppy diskette with the mediainit utility before using it. T o format a new ï¬oppy diskette follow these steps: 1 Log in as root . 2 Make sure that the write-protect tab on the ï¬oppy diskette is in the write position, as shown in Figure 22. 3 Insert the diskette into the ï¬oppy disk drive. 4 In a terminal window , execute mediainit with an interleave of 2 by entering the following: mediainit -i 2 devicefile where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam .
66 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Transferring Data To and From a Floppy Diskette This section describes how to transfer data to and from your ï¬oppy diskette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command with your ï¬oppy driveâ s device ï¬le. The tar command saves ï¬les to a ï¬oppy diskette, restores ï¬les from a ï¬oppy diskette, or lists ï¬les on a ï¬oppy diskette. Y ou need to set the write protect tab to the write position to transfer data to the diskette. The write-protect tab can be in either position when restoring data from a diskette or listing the ï¬les on a diskette. Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to save ï¬les to a ï¬oppy diskette: 1 Check that the write-protect tab on the ï¬oppy diskette is in the write position. 2 Load the formatted ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 3 In a terminal window, enter the following command line to write to the diskette: tar -cvf devicefile pathname where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam and pathname is the path- name of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to write to the dis- kette. Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Your System Use the following instructions to restore ï¬les from a ï¬oppy diskette to your system: 1 Load the ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 2 In a terminal window, use the cd command to change to the directory you want the files to reside in: cd directory_path where dir ectory_path is the pathname of the directory .
67 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive 3 Enter the following command line: tar -xvf devicefile pathname where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam and pathname is the path- name of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to restore from the diskette. If you donât specify pathname, everything on the ï¬oppy diskette is restored. Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to list the ï¬les on a ï¬oppy diskette: 1 Load the ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command line: tar -tvf deviceï¬le where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam. All ï¬les on the ï¬oppy diskette are listed.
68 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive For More Information For more information on using tar and a complete list of the command argu- ments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following in a terminal win- dow: man tar The man utility looks up man pages on the system. Y ou can mount the ï¬oppy drive as a ï¬le system using the SAM utility . Be sure to unmount the drive before removing it as a ï¬le system. For more information about how to mount and unmount the ï¬oppy drive, see the man- ual Using HP-UX (B2910-90001). For more information on copying data to or from your system to other media, including your ï¬oppy diskette, refer to the cpio man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man cpio For more information on copying to or from DOS ï¬les, refer to the doscp man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man doscp For more information on listing the contents of DOS directories, refer to the dosls man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man dosls For more information on using your ï¬oppy disk drive and ï¬oppy diskettes, refer to the ï¬oppy man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man floppy For more information on using the mediainit command, refer to the medi- ainit man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man mediainit
69 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Configuring the Floppy Driver If you reload software or rebuild the Instant Ignition system on your work- station, you need to reconï¬gure the HP-UX Kernel to add the ï¬oppy driver . Use the SAM utility to add the ï¬exible disk driver and build a new HP-UX kernel. For more information about how to reconï¬gure the kernel using SAM, see the following manuals: ⢠System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers (B2355-90040) ⢠Using HP-UX (B2910-90001)
70 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your ï¬oppy disk drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard micro ï¬exible diskettes for use in your 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive, use the following order number: HP-92192X High-Density Micro Flexible Disks (1.44MB Formatted Capacity) - box of ten diskettes
71 5 Solving Problems
72 Solving Problems This chapter contains information to help you determine whatâ s wrong with your system when you have problems. If you have a problem that isnât listed in this chapter , or if your problem persists, contact your designated service representative. When calling for service, always have your systemâ s model number and serial number ready . This chapter is divided into the following sections ⢠Common problems and solutions ⢠Interpreting LED error codes ⢠Dealing with a boot failure ⢠Running system veriï¬cation tests
73 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Common Problems and Solutions The tables in this section list common problems you may encounter with your workstation. The tables also tell you what to do to help solve the prob- lems. Problems with Powering Up the System T able 9 describes possible problems you may encounter when powering up the system and offers solutions. T able 9 Power -up Problems Problem Solution The power LED does not light. Make sure all AC power cables are connected securely to the system. Make sure the power cord is plugged into a working ac out- let. Make sure the power switch is set to the ON position. The power LED lights, but the screen is blank or ï¬ickers. Press the brightness control on the monitor to adjust it. If the screen is still blank, turn off the system and monitor power switches. When the system is completely powered off, check the video cable connections. Go to the section âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appen- dix B for information about displaying and setting your workstationâ s monitor conï¬guration. If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
74 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System T able 10 describes possible problems you may encounter when loading and booting the operating system and offers solutions. T able 10 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System Problem Solution The power LED is lit, and text appears on the screen, but more than two minutes have passed with no sign of system activ- ity . Make sure that all SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are correctly cabled. Check that both SCSI buses are correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) The system stops or hangs while booting. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failureâ in this chapter . If problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
75 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems with the 802.3 Network T able 1 1 describes possible problems you may encounter with the 802.3 net- work and offers solutions. T able 1 1 Problems with the 802.3 Network Problem Solution Cannot reach other sys- tems on the network. Applications that rely on the network will not run. Check the network connector on the back of the system unit. Make sure that the network cable or transceiver is fastened securely to the connector . Network Auto-Negotia- tion fails. Systems can- not connect or establish link. The following can cause Auto-Negotiation failure: ⢠Non-Category 5 cabling. Cabling must be installed by certified installers. ⢠Improper cable termination. ⢠Maximum cable lengths exceeded. ⢠Incompatibility/Interoperability problems between LAN devices. Check the cabling and interfaces for proper installation and operation. If you know the speed/duplex settings for the connection device, you can also manually set the worksta- tion LAN interface setting using the Boot Console Iterface, see âConï¬gure and Display LAN Settingsâ on page 204. When the workstation fails to establish a link using the LAN-TP(RJ45) connector , the workstation automatically switches from the LAN-TP(RJ45) connector to the AUI connector . Y ou can manually set the LAN interface to the AUI connector using the Boot Console Interface, see âCon- ï¬gure and Display LAN Settingsâ on page 204. If problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
76 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive T able 12 describes possible problems you may encounter using the hard disk drive and offers solutions. T able 12 Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive Problem Solution The disk drive is not accessible or does not respond. Make sure that all the SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are correctly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated (terminators con- nected). (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failureâ in this chapter . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
77 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive T able 13 describes a possible problem you may encounter when you use the CD-ROM drive and offers a solution. T able 13 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive Problem Solution The CD-ROM drive does not respond to com- mands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section âRunning System V er- iï¬cation T estsâ in this chapter to verify that the CD-ROM drive is functioning properly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative
78 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the DDS Tape Drive T able 14 describes a possible problem you may encounter using the DDS tape drive and offers solutions. T able 14 Problems Using the DDS T ape Drive Problem Solution The DDS tape drive does not respond to com- mands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you speciï¬ed the correct device ï¬le name for commands that require a device ï¬le name. Make sure the write-protect tab is set to write if you are try- ing to copy data to a data cassette. Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section "Running System V er- iï¬cation T ests" in this chapter to verify that the tape drive is functioning properly . If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
79 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive T able 15 describes a possible problem you may encounter using the ï¬oppy disk drive and offers a solution. T able 15 Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive Problem Solution The ï¬oppy drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you speciï¬ed the correct device ï¬le for com- mands that require a device ï¬le name. Make sure that the write-protect tab is set to write if you are trying to copy data to a ï¬oppy diskette. Follow the instructions in the section "Running System V er- iï¬cation T ests" in this chapter to verify that the ï¬oppy drive is functioning properly . If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
80 Solving Problems LED Error Codes LED Error Codes This section contains information about the error codes displayed by the LEDs on the systemâ s front panel. If an error occurs during the power-up diagnostics tests, the diagnostics use the front panel LEDs to display a code for the failing component. Figure 24 shows the location of the system unitâ s front panel LEDs. The four amber LEDs indicate system status and error codes. T able 16 shows the LED error codes as they appear on the front panel LEDs. Use these LED codes to determine the failing component. Figure 24 System Unit Front Panel LEDs
81 Solving Problems LED Error Codes T able 16 LED Error Codes LED V alue RS-232 Chassis Code Range Description N/A Reserved 7500 No memory found F AUL T Likely cause: SIMMs or pr ocessor boar d N/A Reserved FL T 7000-7FFF Memory Error Fault Likely Cause: Memory SIMMs System console will indicate which SIMM pair fault occurr ed on FL T 1020-4099 Processor board F AUL T (includes PDH which could be on I/O board.) FL T 5000 - 500F FL T 8000 - 8FFF FL T CD00 - CDf f* I/O System F AUL T *Except backplane faults listed below FL T 8500, 8501 FL T 8C00-8CFF Backplane F AUL T PCI F AUL T Any INIT/TEST code INITIALIZA TION and TESTING Note: These two LED codes will alter- nate to indicate forwar d pr ogress: 01 1 1, 1000, 01 1 1... Any fault not in this table including FL T 1000-101C Unknown F AUL T FL T CBF0 - CBFF HPMC F AUL T
82 Solving Problems LED Error Codes FL T A088 - A0FF No console/IPL error F AUL T N/A Reserved N/A Reserved N/A Reserved N/A Power on value. Indicates processor board fault when this value remains for more than a second following power up. T able 16 LED Error Codes LED V alue RS-232 Chassis Code Range Description
83 Solving Problems Dealing with a Boot Failure Dealing with a Boot Failure If your usual boot device (typically a disk) is not responding as it should, you must try to boot from the disk (or another boot device) by selecting it manually . T o boot a device manually , follow these steps: 1 Follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interface,â in Appendix D of this book. NOTICE: Y our workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it terminates the power . 2 At the Main Menu prompt, type the following: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl This causes your workstation to search exhaustively for bootable media. The search command looks for bootable media on your workstation. 3 Boot from one of the listed devices by typing the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, speciï¬ed in mnemonic style notation, such as sescsi.6.0. 4 If your workstation still fails to boot, there is either something wrong with the ï¬le system or with the hardware. If you suspect a ï¬le system failure, see the manual Using HP-UX for help on dealing with ï¬le system failures. If you think that some- thing is wrong with the hardware, continue reading this chapter for more trouble- shooting information. 5 Verify that your SCSI devices are properly terminated, with SCSI terminators in place and properly connected.
84 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests Running System Verification Tests HP-UX uses an online diagnostics product called the Support T ools Man- ager that allows system operation verï¬cations. Three interfaces are available with the Support T ools Manager: a command line interface (accessed through the cstm command), a menu-driven inter- face (accessed through the mstm command), and the graphical user interface (accessed through the xstm command). For more information on these user interfaces, see the online man pages by entering the following at the command line prompt: man cstm man mstm man xstm
85 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests T o access the Support T ools Manager , perform the following steps: 1 At a command line prompt, enter the following: cstm The following message appears: Support Tool Manager Version A.01.00 Type âhelpâ for a list of available commands. CSTM> 2 At the CSTM> prompt, you can enter several commands. T o see what commands are available, type the help command. 3 T o verify the system operation, type the following at the CSTM> prompt: CSTM> verify all Messages similar to the following appear: Verification has started on device (CPU). Verification has started on device (FPU). CSTM>Verification of (FPU) has completed. CSTM>Verification of (CPU) has completed. 4 Press Enter to return to the CSTM> prompt after all test results are reported. 5 T o exit the Support T ools Manager , enter the following: CSTM> exit If any tests failed, further diagnosis is necessary by qualiï¬ed service personnel. Contact your designated service representative.
86 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests
87 A Safety and Regulatory Statements
88 Safety and Regulatory Statements This appendix contains safety and regulatory statements pertaining to your C Class workstation. It provides information on the following topics: ⢠Declaration of Conformity ⢠Special video configuration statements ⢠Emissions regulations ⢠Emissions regulations compliance ⢠Datacom users statement ⢠Acoustics ⢠Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions ⢠Safety statements ⢠Laser safety statements ⢠Warnings and cautions
89 Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 1 Declaration of Conformity 1
90 Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 2 Declaration of Conformity 2
91 Safety and Regulatory Statements Special Video Conï¬guration Statements Special Video Configuration Statements The following statements apply only to those applications which include a cable connected to the S-V ideo connector on the A4248A card. No modiï¬- cation to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected to other connectors on the card but not to the S- V ideo connector . For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: W ARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. For FCC Applications: NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
92 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations Emissions Regulations Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and the Cana- dian Department of Communications. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa- tion. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guaran- tee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip- ment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (determined by turning the equipment off and on), you can correct the inter- ference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Ask the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. Hewlett-Packardâ s system certiï¬cation tests were conducted with HP-sup- ported peripheral devices and HP shielded cables, such as those you receive with your computer . Changes or modiï¬cations not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard could void the user â s authority to operate the equipment. Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference. ⢠This device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ⢠Cables used with this device must be properly shielded to comply with the re- quirements of the FCC.
93 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations Compliance VCCI Class B ITE (Japan) Korea RRL (EMI Class A) Emissions Regulations Compliance Any third-party I/O device installed in HP system(s) must be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the preceding Emissions Regulations state- ments. In the event that a third-party noncompliant I/O device is installed, the customer assumes all responsibility and liability arising therefrom.
94 Safety and Regulatory Statements Acoustics Acoustics Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV Lpa <70dB Lpa<70dB operator position am Arbeitsplatz normal operation normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 T .19 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions Electrostatic charges can damage the integrated circuits on printed circuit boards. T o prevent such damage from occurring, observe the following pre- cautions during board unpacking and installation: ⢠Stand on a static-free mat. ⢠W ear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is dis- charged from your body to ground. ⢠Connect all equipment together , including the static-free mat, static strap, routing nodes, and peripheral units. ⢠Keep uninstalled printed circuit boards in their protective antistatic bags. ⢠Handle printed circuit boards by their edges, once you have removed them from their protective antistatic bags.
95 Safety and Regulatory Statements Safety Statement Safety Statement This equipment conforms to the following safety standards: ⢠UL 1950 ⢠CSA 950 ⢠IEC 950 ⢠EN 60950
96 Safety and Regulatory Statements Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) The CD ROM mass-storage system is certiï¬ed as a Class-1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radia- tion Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the mass-storage system does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Because laser light emitted inside the mass-storage system is com- pletely conï¬ned within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Visible LEDs The visible LED on this product is classiï¬ed as â Class 1 LED PRODUCTâ in accordance with EN 60825-1.
97 Safety and Regulatory Statements W arnings and Cautions Warnings and Cautions
98 Safety and Regulatory Statements W arnings and Cautions
99 B Changing Your Workstationâs Hardware Configuration
100 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration This appendix describes the procedures to change your workstationâ s hard- ware conï¬guration. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Preparing your workstation ⢠Installing storage devices ⢠Removing the main tray assembly ⢠Replacing the main tray assembly ⢠Installing additional memory ⢠Installing the EGRAM module ⢠Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC option board ⢠Changing your monitor type NOTICE: Y our workstation shipped with a package of extra disk slides. Keep the slides in a safe place, you will need them when you add new devices to the storage tray . CAUTION: Always wear a properly grounded wrist strap when reconï¬guring your workstation. Use the following tools to remove or replace hardware parts when changing your conï¬guration: ⢠Light-duty flatblade screwdriver with 150 mm (6 inch) blade ⢠Needlenose pliers Also, read the ESD Precautions in Appendix A of this guide.
101 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs Checking the SCSI IDs T o determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use on your system, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1 At a command line prompt, enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan -f After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ============================================================================================= bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS bc 1 8 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 0 8/0 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 0 8/0.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 3 8/0.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE QUANTUM LPS1080WD target 1 8/0.5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 2 8/0.5.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW target 2 8/0.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8/0.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW ba 0 8/16 bus_adapterCLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter ext_bus 2 8/16/0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface audio 0 8/16/1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Audio tty 0 8/16/4 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ext_bus 1 8/16/5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in SCSI target 3 8/16/5.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8/16/5.2.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA target 4 8/16/5.3 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE tape 0 8/16/5.3.0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A target 5 8/16/5.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 10 8/16/5.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N target 6 8/16/5.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 5 8/16/5.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE MICROP 2112 lan 0 8/16/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in LAN ps2 0 8/16/7 ps2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Keyboard/Mouse bc 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 3 10/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC Fast/WideSCSI Interface target 7 10/12.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 6 10/12.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST31200W graphics 2 10/16 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ba 1 8/20 bus_adapterCLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter hil 0 8/20/1 hil CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in HIL tty 1 8/20/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ba 2 8/20/5 eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Bus Adapter ext_bus 4 8/20/5/3 hshpib CLAIMED INTERFACE EISA card HWP0C70 target 8 8/20/5/3.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE target 9 8/20/5/3.1 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE target 10 8/20/5/3.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
102 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs 2 You can find out the SCSI IDs currently in use by looking under the H/W Path heading. The listing 8/16/5 scsi is the built-in SCSI bus controller. For devices connected to the built-in SCSI bus, such as disks, the fourth number is the SCSI ID for that device. For example, the listing 8/16/5.4.0 in the sample device list tells you that there is a SCSI device (a disk) currently using ID 4 on the SCSI bus. NOTICE: Never use SCSI address 7 for any device. Address 7 is reserved for the SCSI controller .
103 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Preparing Y our Workstation Preparing Your Workstation This section describes how to prepare your workstation for changing its con- ï¬guration. Use the following procedure to prepare your workstation: 1 Power off your workstation by pressing the power button on the front panel. When you press the power button, the workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it powers off the system. 2 When the workstation has completed shutting down and powering off, power off the monitor, and any peripheral devices connected to the workstation. 3 Unplug the power cord of the system unit, the monitor, and any peripheral devic- es from ac wall outlets. 4 Unplug the power cord from the back of the system unit. 5 Remove the floor stand from the system unit, as shown in Figure 25.
104 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Preparing Y our Workstation Figure 25 Removing the Floor Stand 6 Lay the system unit on a flat surface, such as a table top. 7 Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to bare metal on the back of the system unit.
105 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing Storage Devices This section describes how to install storage devices in your workstation. Before installing a new storage device, perform the following procedures as described earlier in this appendix: ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Preparing your workstation CAUTION: All storage devices are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the devices, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the storage device kit. Always handle the drive carefully . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for any of your storage devicesâ SCSI addresses. The host SCSI controllers use SCSI ID 7.
106 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Preparing to Install Your Storage Device This section describes information that you need to consider and procedures that you need to perform before installing any storage device. Configuring your Storage Device T able 17 lists the recommended SCSI IDs for internal storage devices. If an existing device already uses one of the suggested IDs, select an alternate ID. Set the jumpers and SCSI IDs according to the installation instructions that came with your device. Determining Your Storage Devices Position Each storage device is restricted as to where in the storage tray it may be installed. Before installing a storage device, use Figure 26 and T able 18 to determine which storage tray position is correct for your device. Figure 26 shows the storage device positions in the storage tray . T able 18 lists what devices are supported in the different storage tray positions. The numbers in the tableâ s left column refer to the position numbers in the ï¬gure. T able 17 Default SCSI IDs Ultra or Fast, Wide SCSI Devices SCSI ID 1st Hard Disk Drive 6 2nd Hard Disk Drive 5 Single-Ended SCSI Devices SCSI ID CD-ROM Drive 2 DDS-Format T ape Drive 3 NOTE: The ï¬oppy drive is not a SCSI device.
107 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Figure 26 Storage Tray Positions T able 18 Storage T ray Conï¬gurations Storage T ray Position Supported Devices Conditions 1 Floppy Drive 1-inch Low Proï¬le Disk Drive 2 CD-ROM DDS-T ape 3 1-inch Low Proï¬le Disk Drive 1.6-inch Full Height Disk Drive This is the only supported position for a 1.6-inch full height disk drive. 4 1-inch Low Proï¬le Disk Drive All hard disk drives are either fast, wide, differential SCSI devices (C160/ C180) or ultra, wide single-ended SCSI devices (C200 /C240/C360). The CD- ROM drive and the DDS tape drive are single-ended SCSI devices. The ï¬oppy drive is not a SCSI device.
108 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Storage Device Cable Routing When you install your storage device, be aware of the suggested cable rout- ing paths as indicated in the cable routing label that is afï¬xed to the top of the storage tray . Removing the Storage Tray Perform the following procedure to remove the storage tray from the system unit: NOTE: To prevent injury, remove monitor from system unit before removing storage tray. 1 Remove the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 27. 2 If installed, remove any locking device from the storage tray security loop on the rear of the system unit. 3 Place your fingertips in the groove on the bottom of the storage tray bezel. See Figure 27. Figure 27 Removing the Storage Tray 4 Slide the storage tray completely out of the system unit. Retaining Screw
109 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices CAUTION: Be sure to support the storage tray from underneath while sliding it out of the system unit. Proceed to one of the following sections in this appendix to install your stor- age device in the storage tray: ⢠Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format Tape Drive ⢠Installing a Floppy Drive ⢠Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 3 or Position 4 Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format Tape Drive Perform the following procedure to install a CD-ROM or DDS tape drive in the storage tray: 1 Remove the disk filler panel from the top location of the bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt object to pry it from the front, as shown in Figure 28. Figure 28 Removing a Disk Filler Panel
11 0 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 From the rear of the storage tray, line up the disk slides on the CD-ROM or DDS tape drive with the position 1slots in the storage tray chassis, and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 29. Figure 29 Installing a CD-ROM or DDS Tape 3 Push the storage device in until the locking tabs snap into place. 4 Connect the single-ended SCSI-2 data cable and the power cable to the drive. Refer to the cable routing label on the storage tray. 5 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray. CD-ROM or DDS Tape Drive Cable Routing Label
111 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Floppy Drive Perform the following procedure to install a ï¬oppy drive in the storage tray: 1 Remove the disk filler panel from the bottom location of the bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt object to pry it from the front, as shown in Figure 30. Figure 30 Removing a Disk Filler Panel 2 Reach into the storage bay and locate the power and data cables for the floppy drive. Refer to the cable routing label on the storage tray . See Figure 31. 3 Connect the cables to the drive.
11 2 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 4 From the front of the storage tray, line up the disk slides on the floppy drive with the position 2 slots in the storage tray chassis and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 31. Figure 31 Installing a Floppy Drive 5 Push the floppy drive in until the locking tabs snap into place. 6 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray. Cable Routing Label
11 3 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 Perform the following procedure to install a hard disk drive: 1 Remove the disk filler panel from the bottom location of the bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt object to pry it from the front, as shown in Figure 32. Figure 32 Removing a Disk Filler Panel 2 Reach into the storage bay and locate the power and data cables for the disk drive. Refer to the cable routing label on the storage tray . See Figure 33. 3 Connect the cables to the drive. 4 From the front of the storage tray, line up the disk slides on the hard disk drive with the position 1 slots in the storage tray chassis and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 33.
11 4 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Figure 33 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 5 Push the drive in until the locking tabs snap into place. 6 Snap the disk filler panel into the lower bezel position. 7 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray. Cable Routing Label
11 5 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 3 or Position 4 Perform the following procedure to install a hard disk drive in positions 3 or 4 of the storage tray: 1 Remove the two retaining screws from the disk interconnect board, as shown in Figure 34. 2 Remove the fan bracket and disconnect the fan cable. Figure 34 Removing the Disk Interconnect Board 3 Disconnect any cables from the disk interconnect board. 4 Hold the disk interconnect board on the edges and lift it straight up to remove it, as shown in Figure 34.
11 6 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 5 From the rear of the storage tray, line up the disk slides on the hard disk drive with the position 3 or position 4 slots in the storage tray chassis and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 35. Figure 35 Installing a Hard Disk Drive 6 Push the storage device in until the locking tabs snap into place. 7 Connect the SCSI data cable and the power cable to the drive. Cable Routing Label
11 7 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 8 Slide the disk interconnect board into the storage tray, as shown in Figure 36. Figure 36 Installing the Disk Interconnect Board 9 Reconnect the user interface cable, fan cable, and the disk drive data and power cables to the disk interconnect board. 10 Replace the fan bracket. 11 Replace the disk interconnect board retaining screws and tighten them firmly, as shown in Figure 36. 12 Proceed to the section entitled âReplacing the Storage Tray.â
11 8 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Replacing the Storage Tray 1 Slide the storage tray assembly into the system unit chassis, as shown in Figure 37. Figure 37 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 2 Tighten the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 37. 3 Reconnect the power cords to the system unit, the monitor, and any peripherals. Connect the power cords to the ac wall outlets. 4 Power on any peripherals, the monitor, and the system unit. Retaining Screw
11 9 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices If you installed a new hard disk drive, proceed to the section entitled âCon- ï¬guring a Hard Disk Drive.â If you installed a new removable media device, refer to the following chap- ters for information on using the device: ⢠Chapter 2 - Using Your CD-ROM Drive ⢠Chapter 3 - Using Your Digital Data Storage (DDS) Tape Drive ⢠Chapter 4 - Using Your 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive
120 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Configuring a Hard Disk Drive This section describes how to add a hard disk drive to your system as a ï¬le system using SAM. If you installed a new hard disk drive, follow these instructions to make your new disk usable as a ï¬le system. For more infor- mation about conï¬guring a hard disk drive, refer to the System Administra- tion T asks manual. This procedure requires you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as root , contact your system administrator . 1 Log in as root . 2 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN NOTICE: SAM (System Administration Manager) is a utility that performs system administration tasks using a windows graphical user interface. 3 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Periph- eral Devices -> . 4 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Sys- tems -> . 5 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Flop- py , and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens, containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. 6 From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive . 7 The Select a Disk to Add window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the hard disk drive you want to add to your system. 8 Click on OK .
121 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 9 The Set Disk Usage and Options window opens. Select File System and click on OK. 10 The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on OK.
122 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing the Main T ray Assembly Removing the Main Tray Assembly Perform the following steps to remove the main tray assembly: 1 Power off the system, the monitor, and any peripheral devices. Unplug the system unit power cord and the power cord of any peripheral devices from ac wall out- lets. Disconnect the power cord from the system unit. NOTICE: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . 2 Disconnect cables from any peripheral devices. 3 Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to bare metal on the back panel of the system unit. 4 Completely loosen the five thumb screws on the rear of the system unit, as shown in Figure 38. Figure 38 Removing Main Tray Assembly Thumb Screws Thumb Screws
123 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing the Main T ray Assembly 5 Place one hand on the top of the system unit and push, while pulling the handle on the rear panel with your other hand. See Figure 38. 6 Slide the main tray assembly out of the chassis.
124 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Main T ray Assembly Replacing the Main Tray Assembly Perform the following steps to replace the main tray assembly: 1 Align the main tray assembly with the chassis and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 39. Figure 39 Replacing the Main Tray Assembly 2 Slide the main tray in until you feel it make contact with the internal connectors. 3 Push firmly and evenly on the main tray assembly to make sure that all connec- tors are fully seated. 4 Start all five thumb screws loosely, then tighten them firmly. See Figure 39. NOTICE: T o maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that the main tray is fully seated and all four thumb screws are completely tightened. Thumb Screws Thumb Screws
125 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Main T ray Assembly 5 Reconnect the power cables and any other cables that you disconnected when opening the workstation. 6 Power on the monitor , any peripheral devices, and the system unit.
126 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional Memory Installing Additional Memory T ake a moment to read over the following important notes about installing memory . ⢠Before you attempt to install additional memory modules in your C160/C180/ C200/C240/C360 workstation, use the procedure described in Appendix D, âThe Boot Console Interface,â to determine the current memory conï¬guration for this workstation. ⢠Read over the steps involved in installing memory modules before you begin. ⢠You must insert memory modules in pairs of equal size. ⢠Modules must be inserted in the lowest numbered memory connector pair first, then in numerical order. For example, install memory in 0A and 0B first, then 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 3A and 3B, 4A and 4B, and 5A and 5B. Memory slots must be ï¬lled in order from 0A and 0B through 5A and 5B. Refer to Figure 40 for memory pair numbering and location. Insert memory modules in decreasing or- der of memory module size. For example, install 128 MB modules, then 64 MB, 32 MB, and finally, 16 MB modules. ⢠When you have finished installing additional memory modules, use the Boot Console Interface to verify that they are seen by the workstation.
127 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional Memory Perform the following steps to add memory modules to your workstation. 1 Remove the main tray assembly according to the directions in âRemoving the Main Tray Assemblyâ earlier in this appendix. 2 Use Figure 40 to locate the memory modules on the CPU Assembly. Figure 40 C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 Memory Module Location This workstation has 12 memory slots, labeled 0A, 0B through 5A, 5B. The memory conï¬guration is 32 MB to 1.5 GB installed in pairs of 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, or 128 MB memory modules. Memory modules must be installed in pairs of equal capacity . Always install the largest capacity memory modules in the lowest numbered memory slots. For example, if you have a pair of 16 MB memory modules and a pair of 64 MB memory modules, ï¬rst install the pair of 64 MB memory modules in slots 0A and 0B, then install the 16 MB modules in slots 1A and 1B. NOTICE: Memory slots must be ï¬lled in order from 0A and 0B through 5A and 5B. Rear of Main Tray 0A 4A 0B 4B 2A 5A 2B 5B 3A 1A 3B 1B
128 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional Memory 3 Close the ejector tabs on each side of the memory connector to lessen the force needed to seat the memory module. See Figure 41. Figure 41 Installing Memory Modules 4 Place the memory module in the connector, lining it up with the guides. Make sure to put the notched end toward the white ejector tab, as shown in Figure 41. 5 Press firmly and evenly on the memory module to ensure that it seats properly. White Ejector Tab
129 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional Memory 6 Replace the main tray assembly as described in âReplacing the Main Tray As- sembly,â earlier in this appendix. T o verify that this installation was successful, follow the steps in Appendix D, âThe Boot Console Interface,â on displaying memory information. If you have only replaced a faulty memory module, you must issue the pdt clear command in the service menu of the Boot Console Interface. Answer yes ( y) to the prompt â Continue? (Y/N) >.â
130 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) Before installing the EGRAM module, perform the procedure in Removing the Main T ray Assembly on page 122. Perform the following steps to add the EGRAM module to your workstation: 1 Press the release clip and rotate the EISA fan, as shown in Figure 42. Figure 42 Rotating the EISA Fan
131 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 2 Slide the EISA slider to the side to remove it, as shown in Figure 43. 3 Remove the screw from the EISA retainer and remove it, as shown in Figure 43. Figure 43 Removing the EISA Slider and Retainer 4 Grasp the option board by the edge with both hands and pull it straight out. Remove all option boards, making note of which option slot each one was installed in. NOTICE All boards must be replaced in their original slots or your system may not run properly . EISA Slider EISA Retainer
132 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 5 Install the standoffs into the EGRAM module, as shown in Figure 44. Push the standoffs into the holes on the module until the clips fully emgage with the board. 6 Align the connector on the EGRAM module with the connector on the I/O board, while aligning the standoffs with the holes in the I/O board. See Figure 44. Figure 44 Installing the EGRAM Module 7 Connect the EGRAM module to the I/O board. Push down firmly on the connec- tor area to make sure it is fully seated. Push firmly near the standoffs to make sure that they are fully engaged with the I/O board.
133 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 8 Make sure that the EISA fan is fully rotated, as shown in Figure 45. Figure 45 Rotating the EISA Fan 9 Slide the option boards into the slots that they came out of, as shown in Figure 46. Make sure that the hole in each boardâs handle aligns with the pin on the back panel. Figure 46 Installing an Option Board
134 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 10 Press in firmly on both ends of the option board at the same time to make sure that it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. 11 Replace the EISA retainer and its screw, as shown in Figure 47. 12 Replace the EISA slider, as shown in Figure 47. Figure 47 Installing the EISA Retainer and EISA Slider
135 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 13 Rotate the fan back into place, as shown in Figure 48. Push it into the rear panel firmly until the clip snaps into place. Figure 48 Securing the Fan 14 Replace the main tray assembly as described in Replacing the Main Tray Assem- bly on page 124.
136 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Y our workstation has 4 option slots, as shown in Figure 49. On C160/C180 workstations, slots 1 and 2 each support either GSC or EISA boards. Slot 3 supports a GSC, EISA, or PCI board. Slot 4 supports a GSC or PCI board. On C200/C240/C360 workstations, slots 1, 2, 3 and 4 each support either GSC or PCI boards. Slot 1 supports a GSC, EISA, or PCI board. Figure 49 Option Slots from Outside the System Unit Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4
137 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Graphics Adapter Considerations If you are installing a graphics option, read the information in this section ï¬rst. Special Video Configuration Statements The following statements apply only to those applications which include a cable connected to the S-V ideo connector on the A4248A card. No modiï¬- cation to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected to other connectors on the card but not to the S- V ideo connector . For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: W ARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. For FCC Applications: NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
138 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Graphics Paths graphics(0) is the built-in 8-plane graphics adapter (C160/C180 only). graphics(1) through graphics(4) are graphics adapters installed in option slots 1 through 4. When a dual display graphics adapter (an adapter which has two video out- put connectors) is installed, the video connector on the left (when looking at the system from the rear) is graphics( NA) and the video connector on the right is graphics (NB), where N is the slot number in which the graphics adapter is installed. A and B denote the two video output connectors on the dual display adapter . For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 3 would be graphics(3A) and graphics(3B).
139 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Graphics Configuration Restrictions This subsection describes restrictions on the installation and support of graphics adapters. Graphics Displays The system supports only four graphics displays at a time. A âdisplayâ is a video output port or connector . For example, the Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) is a dual display card. It has two external video connectors so it accounts for two of the maximum of four displays. Y ou need to install a V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4450A) in addition to the built-in EG Graphics, and the A4451A for a four display system. The built-in graphics adapter ( graphics(0)) accounts for one graphics dis- play . Dual Graphics Adapters Yo u may not install dual display graphics adapters in option slot 1 and option slot 3 at the same time. Installing dual display graphics adapters in option slot 1 and option slot 3 at the same time results in the graphics adapter in slot 1 being disabled. Yo u may not install dual display graphics adapters in option slot 2 and option slot 4 at the same time. Installing dual display graphics adapter in option slot 2 and option slot 4 at the same time reults in the graphics adapter in slot 2 being disabled. Multi-board Graphics Adapters When a V isualize48Z (A4244A) two board graphics adapter is installed, only one other graphics adapter may be installed in the option slots. If the highest numbered slot used by the V isual- ize 48Z board set is an even numbered slot, then you may only install a graphics card in the remaing odd numbered slot. If the highest numbered slot used by the V isualize 48Z board set is an odd numbered slot, then you may only install a graphics card in the remaining even numbered slot. For exam- ple; assuming a V isualize 48Z board set is installed in slots 1 and 2, slot two is the highest numbered slot used and it is an even numbered slot. Therefore you may only install an aditional graphics adapter in slot 3, which is the remaining odd numbered slot. NOTICE: The A4077A Color Graphics Card, A4078A Dual Color Graphics Card, A4079B HCRX-8Z graphics adapter , and the A4071B HCRX-24 graphics adapter with the A4072A Z Accelerator attached are not supported in the Model C160/C180.
140 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Upgrading a C160/180 With an HP VISUALIZE-FX Graphics Adapter When you upgrade a Model C160/180 to use the HP VISUALIZE-FX Graphics Adaptor you also need to upgrade the Model C160/180 power sup- ply . When you upgrade with the HP VISUALIZE-FX A4452A Graphics Adapter you must use the HP VISUALIZE Upgrade Kit, partnumber A4450A. When you upgrade with the HP VISUALIZE-FX A4453A Graphics Adapter you must use the HP VISUALIZE Upgrade Kit, partnumber A4451A. Operation with the older version power supply is not supported.
141 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Installing the Option Board Follow these steps to install a GSC, EISA, or PCI board into your worksta- tion: 1 Remove the main tray assembly as described in âRemoving the Main Tray As- semblyâ earlier in this appendix. 2 Press the fan release clip and rotate the fan, as shown in Figure 50. Figure 50 Rotating the Fan 3 Remove the screw from the EISA retainer, and remove the EISA retainer, as shown in Figure 51. Figure 51 Removing the EISA Retainer EISA Retainer
142 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 4 Remove the EISA slider, as shown in Figure 52. 5 In the desired EISA slot, turn the blank plateâs locking knob counter-clockwise to unlock the plate, as shown in Figure 52. Figure 52 Removing the EISA Slider and Blank Plate 6 Remove the blank plate from the slot, as shown in Figure 52. Blank Plate Locking Knob EISA Slider
143 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 7 Slide the board into the slot, as shown in Figure 53. Make sure that the hole in the boardâs handle aligns with the pin on the back panel. Figure 53 Installing an Option Board 8 Press in firmly on both ends of the option board at the same time to make sure that it is firmly seated in the backplane connector.
144 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 9 Replace the EISA retainer and its screw, as shown in Figure 54. Figure 54 Installing the EISA Retainer and EISA Slider 10 Replace the EISA slider, as shown in Figure 54.
145 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 11 Rotate the fan back into place, as shown in Figure 55. Push it into the rear panel firmly until the clip snaps into place. Figure 55 Securing the Fan 12 Replace the main tray assembly as described in âReplacing the Main Tray As- semblyâ earlier in this appendix.
146 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery Replacing the Battery 1 Remove the main tray as described in âRemoving the Main Tray Assemblyâ earlier in this chapter. 2 Note the orientation of the battery. Make sure that you put the new battery in place with the positive ( ) side facing in the same direction. 3 Lift the clip and slip the battery out of its holder, as shown in Figure 42. Figure 56 Removing the Battery
147 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 4 Insert the new battery in the same orientation as the old one. (Use only HP part number 1420-0314 or equivalent.) NOTICE: If you cannot gain access to the battery , you may need to remove an option board. Refer to âInstalling an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Boardâ earlier in this appendix for information on accessing the option boards. CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer . Dispose of batteries according to manufacturer â s instructions. A TTENTION: Il y a danger dâexplosion sâil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou dâun type recommandé par le constructeur . Mettre au rébut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. 5 Follow the instructions in âReplacing the Main Tray Assembly,â earlier in this appendix, to close and restart the system.,
148 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype Changing Your Monitor Type Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a speciï¬c resolution and frequency . If you replace your monitor with a different type, you must reconï¬gure your workstation to support it. There are two ways to reconï¬gure your workstation to support a different monitor type: Setting the Monitor Type from the Boot Console Interface T o change your workstationâ s graphics parameters befor e you replace your monitor , go to âDisplaying and Setting the Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix D. Setting the Monitor Type at Power On If you replace your workstationâs monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâs graphics parameters by using the monitor com- mand before doing so, you need to perform the following: If your keyboard connects to the PS/2 connector on your system, wait 2 sec- onds after the Num Lock light ï¬ashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. If you have a keyboard that connects to the HIL connector on your system, press T ab every three seconds during the boot sequence to initiate the auto- matic monitor selection process. Y our system queries you for the new monitor type. Select the new type by pressing Enter . The system queries you to conï¬rm your selection. Press y to save this monitor type. If you donât press y , the system stops cycling. Y ou can use the monitor command in the conï¬guration menu to change monitor type.
149 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype Changing the Console to External Terminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the fol- lowing procedure to display to console to an external terminal: 1 Turn system power off. 2 Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3 Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the top serial connector) on the system rear panel. 4 Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
150 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype
151 C SCSI Connections
152 SCSI Connections This appendix provides information about connecting Small Computer Sys- tem Interface (SCSI) devices to an HP 9000 C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstation. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠SCSI bus differences ⢠SCSI restrictions ⢠Determining SCSI bus length ⢠Assigning SCSI device IDs ⢠Connecting to the SCSI ports The instructions in this chapter assume you are using HP-UX version 9.05 or later operating system with HP VUE version 3.0 or later interface. NOTICE When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus. Failure to terminate the SCSI bus will result in erratic device behavior .
153 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences SCSI Bus Differences A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus is an IEEE standard bus for connecting your workstation to internal and external devices (SCSI devices) running at different speeds, singly or in combination. Examples of these SCSI devices are 4-mm DDS-format tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and W in- chester hard disk drives. There are two types of SCSI buses available with this workstation - a nar- row , single-ended SCSI bus (SE SCSI), and a fast, wide differential SCSI bus (FWD SCSI) (on C160/C180/C200-upgrade), or an ultra wide single- ended SCSI bus (Ultra W ide-SE) (C200/C240/C360 only). T able 19 shows the speciï¬cation differences between these SCSI buses, and T able 20 shows the SCSI addresses, ID numbers, and arbitration priorities for each. CAUTION: Do not mix single-ended and fast, wide devices on any one bus type. Doing this will cause a system failure. T able 19 SCSI Bus Differences T ransfer Rate Data Bus Width Maximum Addresses* Maximum Cable Length Device Physical Location Controller Embedded or Plugable Narrow Single- Ended 8 bits 8 6.0 meters (19.6 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 5 Mbytes per second Fast, Wide Dif- ferential 16 bits 16 25 meters (82 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 20 Mbytes per second
154 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences Ultra Wide-SE (C200/C240/ C360 only) 16 bits 16 3 meters (9.84 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 40 Mbytes per second * Address 7 is reserved for host controller use on all buses. T able 19 SCSI Bus Differences T ransfer Rate Data Bus Width Maximum Addresses* Maximum Cable Length Device Physical Location Controller Embedded or Plugable
155 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences T able 20 SCSI Bus Addresses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities SCSI Address SCSI ID Number Priority 15 . . . . . . 8 7 . . . . . . 0 7 . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . 1 6 . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . 2 5 . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . 3 4 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . 4 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . 5 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . 7 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 15 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 14 . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 13 . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 12 . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 10 . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 14 9 . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . 15 8 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 16 8-bit Devices Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus 16-bit Devices Fast, W ide Differential and Ultra, W ide Single Ended SCSI Bus
156 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions SCSI Restrictions This section describes the SCSI restrictions that apply to your workstation in the following areas: ⢠Cables ⢠Connectors and Terminator ⢠SCSI configuration constraints Cables All SCSI devices ship without cables. Only SCSI cables approved by HP can be used to connect your workstation and any SCSI devices. HP offers the following SCSI cables for narrow , single-ended SCSI devices: ⢠K2296 cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠K2297 cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally connected devices to the system fast, wide differential port: ⢠C2911A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally connected devices to the system ultra, wide single-ended port (C200/C240/C360): ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length ⢠C2979A cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length
157 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: SCSI cables approved by HP are designed to function within the SCSI tolerances for HP devices. Use of other cables can result in signiï¬cant problems with system operation. The narrow , singled-ended SCSI implemented on C160/C180/C200/C240/ C360 workstations limits the total cable length of narrow SE SCSI cables to 6 meters (19.6 feet). The fast, wide, differential SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of FW SCSI cables to 25 meters (82 feet). The ultra, wide single-ended SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of ultra, wide-SE SCSI cables to 3 meters (9.84 feet). Always use the shortest possible cable(s) for your conï¬guration. If you are daisy-chaining narrow SE SCSI devices together , use the follow- ing cables: ⢠92222A cable with 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) length ⢠92222B cable with 1.0 meter (3.2 feet) length ⢠92222C cable with 2.0 meter (6.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining FWD SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠C2911A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining ultra, wide-SE SCSI devices together , use the fol- lowing cable: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length NOTICE See âDetermining SCSI Bus Lengthâ later in this Appendix to determine the total length of your cables.
158 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions Connectors and Terminators Any narrow , SE SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 50-pin high-density thumb screw connector on the end connecting to the system board. Any fast, wide differential or ultra, wide-SE SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 68-pin high-density thumb screw connector on both ends. NOTICE The terminators for fast, wide differential SCSI and ultra, wide-SE SCSI are different and not compatible, even though the connectors are identical. It is necessary to put a terminator on empty SCSI connectors on the back panel of the system. Also, a SCSI device attached to the SCSI bus or the last external device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order ter- minator C2904A (for 50-pin connectors) or C2905A (for 68-pin fast, wide differential connectors) or C2972A (for 68-pin ultra, wide-SE connectors) from Hewlett-Packard.
159 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions SCSI Configuration Constraints Y ou are limited to the number of same-type SCSI devices per system. Before adding another SCSI device, determine if the system can support the addi- tional device. This workstation offers the following types of SCSI bus, each with its own conï¬guration constraints: ⢠Narrow, Single-ended SCSI bus (C160/C180/C200 /C240/C360) ⢠Fast, Wide Differential SCSI bus (C160/C180/C200 upgrade) ⢠Ultra, Wide-Single-Ended SCSI bus (C200 /C240/C360 only) Narrow, Single-ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints For the NSE SCSI bus, HP-UX supports only one of each type of removable disk drive and two of the same type tape devices per system. T able 21 shows conï¬guration constraints for each NSE SCSI device type. If the system has an internal CD-ROM drive or DDS tape drive, you must count them as NSE SCSI devices. T able 21 NSE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints NSE SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Hard Disk Drives (external only) 7 CD-ROM Drives (one internal) 1 4-mm DDS T ape Drives (one internal) 2 9-track T ape Drives 2 650-MB Magneto-Optical Drives 1 Magneto-Optical Autochangers (see notice below) 1 Maximum Number of NSE SCSI Devices 7 NOTICE: Magneto-Optical Autochangers use three NSE SCSI drive address. Each ad- dress must be accounted for in the maximum number of NSE SCSI devices al- lowed.
160 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended SCSI, fast, wide differential SCSI, or ultra, wide- SE SCSI peripherals on the same SCSI bus. Fast, Wide, Differential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints FWD SCSI does not work with either SE SCSI. T able 22 shows the conï¬guration constraints for each FWD SCSI device type. CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended, fast, wide differential, or ultra, wide-SE SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Ultra, wide single-ended SCSI does not work with narrow , single ended or fast wide differential SCSI. T able 22 shows the conï¬guration constraints for each ultra, wide- SE SCSI device type. CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended, fast, wide differential, or ultra, wide-SE SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. T able 22 FWD SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints FWD SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed FWD SCSI Disk Drive (up to 2 internal) 15 FWD SCSI Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 7 T able 23 Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI Disk Drive (up to 2 internal) 4 Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 1
161 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Determining SCSI Bus Length This section helps you to determine the total length of the narrow , single- ended SCSI bus, the fast, wide differential SCSI bus and ultra, wide single- ended SCSI bus. Narrow, Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total narrow , single-ended SCSI bus length (including the system unit, external SCSI devices, and SCSI interconnect cables) using T able 24: 1 Find all of your external SCSI devices in the first column. In the third column, write the SCSI bus lengths (from the second column) that correspond to your de- vices. NOTICE In the third column, the length for the System Unit is already listed. This number must always be used for the system unit. 2 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â 3 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 4 Add the subtotals together and write the total in the Total SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE The total length of the narrow , single-ended SCSI bus must not exceed 6 meters (19.6 feet). If the number you write for T otal SCSI Bus Length is greater than 6 meters (19.6 feet), try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables.
162 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: __________ __________ T otal SCSI Bus Length = __________ (T otal narrow , single-ended SCSI bus length not to exceed 6 meters [19.6 feet]) T able 24 Bus Length W orksheet for Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Bus SCSI Device Internal SCSI Bus Length meters (feet) Device Internal Length meters (feet) External Cable Length meters (feet) System Unit 1.3 (4.3) 1.3 (4.26) N/A A2655A 0.3 (1.0) C1520B 0.2 (0.7) C1521B 0.2 (0.7) C1700C 1.1 (3.6) C1701C 0.3 (1.0) C1704C 0.0 (0.0) C1705C 0.0 (0.0) C2213A 1.5 (4.9) C2217T 1.3 (4.3)
163 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total bus length for the fast, wide differential SCSI bus on your system, using T able 25. 1 List all of your internal fast, wide differential SCSI devices in the first column. 2 In the third column, write the lengths of the internal fast, wide differential SCSI bus that correspond to your devices. 3 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the fast, wide differential SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) 4 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write the sum on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 5 Add the subtotals together and write the total on the Total Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Bus Length line. NOTICE: The total length of thefast, wide differentila SCSI bus must not exceed 25 meters (82 feet). If the number you write for T otal Fast, W ide Differential SCSI Bus Length is greater than 25 meters, try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables.
164 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: ______________ ________ T otal Fast, W ide Differential SCSI Bus Length = ______________ (T otal fast, wide differential SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 25 meters [82 feet]) T able 25 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Bus Length W orksheet Fast, Wide Differential Device Internal Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Bus Length meters(feet) Device Internal Length meters(feet) External Cable Length meters(feet) System Unit 1.5 (4.9) [1.1 (3.61) C200 /C240 only] N/A C3034T 1.0 (3.3) C3035T 1.0 (3.3) C3036T 1.0 (3.3)
165 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Ultra, Wide, Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total bus length for the ultra, wide, sin- gle-ended SCSI bus on your system, using T able 26. 1 List all of your internal Ultra, Wide SCSI devices in the first column. 2 In the third column, write the lengths of the internal Ultra, Wide SCSI bus that correspond to your devices. 3 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the Ultra, Wide SCSI intercon- nect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsec- tion âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) 4 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write the sum on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 5 Add the subtotals together and write the total on the Total Ultra, Wide SCSI Bus Length line. NOTICE: The total length of the Ultra, W ide, Single-ended SCSI bus must not exceed 3 meters (9.84 feet). If the number you write for T otal Ultra, W ide SCSI Bus Length is greater than 3 meters, try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables.
166 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: ______________ ________ T otal Ultra, W ide SE SCSI Bus Length = ______________ (T otal ultra, wide SE SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 3 meters [9.84 feet]) T able 26 Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length W orksheet Ultra, Wide SE Device Internal Ultra, Wide SE SCSI Bus Length meters(feet) Device Internal Length meters(feet) External Cable Length meters(feet) System Unit 1.1 (3.61) N/A Device _______ 1.0 (3.3) Device _______ 1.0 (3.3) Device _______ 1.0 (3.3)
167 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs Assigning SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your existing SCSI device IDs. T o determine which SCSI device IDs are available for your device, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1 At a command line prompt, enter the following: /usr/sbin/ioscan -f After a few moments, the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ================================================================================ bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_ NEXUS bc 1 8 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 0 8/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI target 0 8/12.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 3 8/12.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE QUANTUM LPS1080WD target 1 8/12.5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 2 8/12.5.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW target 2 8/12.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8/12.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW ba 0 8/16 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter ext_bus 2 8/16/0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface audio 0 8/16/1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Audio tty 0 8/16/4 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ext_bus 1 8/16/5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in SCSI target 3 8/16/5.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8/16/5.2.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA target 4 8/16/5.3 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE tape 0 8/16/5.3.0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A target 5 8/16/5.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 10 8/16/5.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N target 6 8/16/5.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 5 8/16/5.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE MICROP 2112 lan 0 8/16/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in LAN ps2 0 8/16/7 ps2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Keyboard/Mouse bc 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 3 10/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC add on Fast/Wide SCSI target 7 10/12.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 6 10/12.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST31200W graphics 2 10/16 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ba 1 10/20 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter hil 0 10/20/1 hil CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in HIL tty 1 10/20/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ba 2 10/20/5 eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Bus Adapter ext_bus 4 10/20/5/3 hshpib CLAIMED INTERFACE EISA card HWP0C70 target 8 10/20/5/3.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE target 9 10/20/5/3.1 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE target 10 10/20/5/3.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
168 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs 2 You can tell which SCSI IDs are currently in use by looking under the H/W Path heading. The listing 8/16/5 scsi is the built-in SCSI bus controller. For devices connected to the built-in SCSI bus, such as disks, the fourth number is the SCSI ID for that device. For example, the listing 8/16/5.4.0 in the sample device list tells you that there is a SCSI device (a disk) currently using ID 4 on the SCSI bus. Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check what SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 27: 1 Write in the SCSI device ID of any internal devices connect to the narrow, single- ended SCSI bus in Table 27. 2 Write in the device ID of any eternal devices connect to the narrow, single-ended SCSI bus. 3 Add your new drive to the table as either an internal or an external device. NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI addresses, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the SCSI bus. 4 Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. You can use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. See the drive installation documentation for information on changing the device ID.
169 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI bus controller . T able 27 Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (Only 0 through 6 A vailable) Internal External Internal System Drives: CD-ROM Drive (if present, uses ID No.2) __________ N/A 4-mm DDS T ape Drive (if present, uses ID No.1) __________ N/A Internal Device Drives __________ N/A 1st Internal Device __________________ __________ N/A 2nd Internal Device __________________ __________ N/A External Device Drives N/A __________ 1st External Device __________________ N/A __________ 2nd External Device __________________ N/A __________ 3rd External Device __________________ N/A __________ 4th External Device __________________ N/A __________ 5th External Device __________________ N/A __________ 6th External Device __________________ N/A __________ 7th External Device __________________ N/A __________ NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 7 single-ended SCSI devices (internal and external) connected to the system.
170 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs Fast, Wide Differential SCSI IDs (C160/C180/C200 Upgrades) Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 28. 1 Write in the type of each device currently connected to your system under the heading âFast, Wide Differential SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 2 Add your new drive to the table. 3 Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new fast, wide SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able 28 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Device Drives and Device ID Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device ______________________________ __________ 2nd Internal Device ______________________________ __________ 1st External Device _______________________________ __________ 2nd External Device _______________________________ __________ 3rd External Device _______________________________ __________ 4th External Device _______________________________ __________ NOTICE: You can have no more than 15 SCSI devices connected to a fast, wide bus.
171 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs Ultra, Wide SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 29. 1 Write in the type of each device currently connected to your system under the heading âUltra, Wide SE SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 2 Add your new drive to the table. 3 Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new ultra, wide SE SCSI de- vice ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for informa- tion on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able 29 Ultra, Wide SE SCSI Device Drives and Device ID Ultra, Wide SE SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device ______________________________ __________ 2nd Internal Device ______________________________ __________ 1st External Device ______________________________ __________ 2nd External Device ______________________________ __________ NOTICE: You can have no more than 4 SCSI devices connected to a ultra, wide SE bus.
172 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports Connecting to the SCSI Ports This section describes how to connect to the system SCSI ports (narrow sin- gle-ended and fast, wide differential or ultra, wide single-ended). System SCSI Port Connection The system contains two (2) SCSI connectors: ⢠System Narrow, Single-Ended SCSI Connector ⢠System Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Connector (C160/C180/C200 upgrade) or Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI Connector (C200 /C240/C360) Figure 57 shows the two SCSI connectors. SCSI cables connect to these ports with a high-density thumb screw connector . Figure 57 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without Terminators Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Narrow Single-ended SCSI Ultra, Wide-SE (C200/C240/C360)
173 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports NOTICE: It is necessary to put a terminator on empty SCSI connectors on the backpanel, or the last device connected to the SCSI bus. T erminators are shipped with the system. Do mix Fast, W ide and Ultra, W ide-SE terminators.
174 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports
175 D The Boot Console Interface
176 The Boot Console Interface This appendix describes the different features of the boot console interface and how to use them. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠Boot console interface features ⢠Accessing the boot console interface ⢠Booting your workstation ⢠Searching for bootable media ⢠Resetting your workstation ⢠Displaying and setting paths ⢠Displaying and setting the monitor type ⢠Displaying the current memory configuration ⢠Displaying the status of the System I/O ⢠Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search flags ⢠Displaying and setting the Security mode ⢠Displaying and setting the Fastboot mode ⢠Displaying the LAN station address ⢠Displaying system information ⢠Displaying PIM information
177 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features Boot Console Interface Features There are times when you want to interact directly with the hardware of your workstation before it boots the operating system. Y our workstation provides a menu-driven boot console interface that allows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain system parameters, even if the operating system is unavailable. Here are some of the things you can do: ⢠Boot your workstation ⢠Search for bootable media ⢠Reset your workstation ⢠Display and set boot paths ⢠Display and set your monitor type ⢠Display memory configuration information ⢠Display the status of the EISA, GSC, and PCI slots ⢠Set Auto Boot and Auto Search ⢠Set Fastboot ⢠Display LAN information ⢠Display system information ⢠Display PIM information NOTICE: All of the tasks in the boot console interface should be performed by a system administrator . The boot console menus follow , showing the various tasks you can perform and the information available. The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters. Help is available for all the menus and commands by using either help, he, or ? and the menu or command you want help on.
178 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Main Menu ----------------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY][<path>]Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices COnfiguration [<command>] Access Configuration menu/commands INformation [<command>] Access Information menu/commands SERvice [<command>] Access Service menu/commands DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system ------ Main Menu: Enter command >
179 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Configuration Menu -------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- AUto [BOot|SEArch] [ON|OFF] Display or set specified auto flag BootID [<proc>] [<boot ID>] Display or modify processor boot ID BootINfo Display boot-related information BootTimer [0 - 200] Seconds allowed for boot attempt CPUconfig {<proc>] [ON|OFF] Config/deconfig processor DEfault Set the system to predefined values FastBoot [ON|OFF] Display or set boot tests execution LanConfig [<params>] Display or set LAN configuration MOnitor [LIST|<path> <type>] Change the current monitor type PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>] Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices SECure [ON|OFF] Set/show security mode TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s] Read or set real time clock in GMT BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Configuration Menu: Enter command >
180 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Information Menu ---------------------------------------------- Command Description ----------- ----------- ALL Display all system information BootINfo Display boot-related information CAche Display cache information ChipRevisions Display revisions of VLSI and firmware COprocessor Display coprocessor information FwrVersion Display firmware version IO Dispay I/O interface information LanAddress Display built-in system LAN address MEmory Display memory information PRocessor Display processor information WArnings Display selftest warning messages BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command> Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Information Menu: Enter command >
181 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Service Menu -------------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- ChassisCodes [<proc>|ON|OFF] Display/enable/disable chassis codes CLEARPIM Clear (zero) the contents of PIM EepromRead [<addr>] {<len>] Read EEPROM locations MemRead <addr> [<len>] [a] Read memory locations PciDelay [<value>] Display or set PCI delay value PDT [CLEAR] Display or clear the Page Deallocation Table PIM [<proc> [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]] Display PIM information BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Service Menu: Enter command >
182 The Boot Console Interface Accessing the Boot Console Interface Accessing the Boot Console Interface T o access the boot console interface, follow these steps: NOTICE: This procedure should be done by a system administrator . 1 Close any files and applications on your workstation. 2 Press the power switch on the front panel of the system unit. NOTICES: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . Make sure that you do not unplug the systemâ s power cord or otherwise interrupt power to the system unit at this time. 3 When the system has completely shut down, power on your workstation. If Autoboot is turned off, the boot sequence automatically stops at the boot console Main Menu. If Autoboot is turned on, you will see the following messages: Processor is starting Autoboot process. To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. If Autoboot and Autosearch are both turned on, you will see the following mes- sages: Processor is booting from first available device.To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. NOTICE: If you are using a power-saving monitor , you will have less than 10 seconds from the time this message appears to press a key . 4 Press a key. You will then see the message: Boot terminated The Main Menu of the boot console appears.
183 The Boot Console Interface Booting Y our Workstation Booting Your Workstation Usually , you start your workstation by turning it on and waiting for HP-UX to boot automatically . However , you may not always want the usual sequence to occur . For example, you may want to start your workstation from an operating sys- tem that is stored on a device that is different from your usual boot device. If your normal operating system kernel or the disk on which it resides becomes damaged or unusable, you may wish to boot from a different disk or perhaps another type of device, such as a DDS-format tape drive. Here are some situations and examples: ⢠If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a bootable operating system, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Con- sole Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, speciï¬ed in Mnemonic Style Notation. For example, if you wish to boot an operating system that is stored on a DDS- format tape in a drive that is located at â âsescsi.1.0â â, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following command at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot sescsi.1.0 The operating system on the speciï¬ed device is used to start your workstation. ⢠If you wish to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) before booting your workstation, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ ear- lier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device Y ou are prompted: Interact with IPL (Y,N,Q)>
184 The Boot Console Interface Booting Y our Workstation Answering yes ( y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the speciï¬ed device. After a short time, the following prompt appears on your screen: ISL> ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HP-UX operating system. If you do not want ISL to be loaded, you must enter n. For example, if the usual kernel ( /stand/vmunix) on your root disk ( fwscsi.6.0) has become corrupted, and you wish to boot your workstation from the backup kernel ( /stand/vmunix.prev), type the following at the ISL> prompt: ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev ⢠If you do not know which media in your ï¬le systems have bootable oper- ating systems, you can ï¬nd them with the sear ch IPL command.
185 The Boot Console Interface Searching for Bootable Media Searching for Bootable Media T o list devices that contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccess- ing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl The search command searches all buses. The search may turn up more devices than there are lines on your display . If you are using a text terminal, you may control the progress of the search from your terminalâ s keyboard by performing the following steps: ⢠T o hold the display temporarily , press Ctrl S. ⢠To continue the display, press Ctrl Q. ⢠To halt the search, press any other key These ï¬ow-control commands do not work with a bitmapped display , but such a display can show more than forty lines of text, so you are unlikely to need them. T o search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl device_type Where device_type is one of the following: fwscsi is the built-in fast, wide SCSI bus (or ultra, wide-SE on C200). sescsi is the built-in single-ended SCSI bus. lan is all connections to the built-in LAN. gsc n is an optional fast, wide SCSI interface in slot number n.
186 The Boot Console Interface Resetting Y our Workstation Resetting Your Workstation T o reset your workstation, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Con- sole Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > reset T o reset your workstation to its predeï¬ned values, follow the directions in "Accessing the Boot Console Interface" earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt to access the Conï¬guration Menu: Main Menu: Enter command > co When the Conï¬guration Menu appears, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > default
187 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths Displaying and Setting Paths A path is the hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. The path command sets the system paths shown in T able 30. The path command sets and displays the hardware address of a speciï¬ed device attached to the I/O bus of your workstation. T o display the current settings for the system paths, type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path T able 30 System Paths Path T ype Device primary or pri Y our workstationâ s default boot device (usually the root disk) alternate or alt Y our workstationâ s alternate boot device (usually a DDS-format tape device) console or con Y our workstationâ s primary display device keyboard or key Y our workstationâ s primary ASCII input device
188 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths The paths are displayed in Mnemonic Style Notation, as shown in T able 31. T o display the current setting for a particular system path, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able 30. For example, to get the path to the primary boot device, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path primary T o set a system path to a new value, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type path where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able 30 and path is the speciï¬cation of the path in Mnemonic Style Notation (as described in T able 31). For example, to set the primary boot path to a SCSI disk with an ID of 6.0, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path pri sescsi.6.0 T able 31 Mnemonic Style Notation I/O T ype Speciï¬cation Format Built-in UWSCSI fwsci. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Built-in FWSCSI fwsci. scsi_address. logical_unit_number Built-in SCSI sescsi. scsi_address. logical_unit_number Optional gsc n. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Built-in LAN lan. server_addr ess .init_timeout.io_timeout
189 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a speciï¬c resolution and frequency . If you replace your workstationâ s monitor with a different type of monitor , you must reconï¬gure your workstation to support the new monitor . The Monitor Command The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics conï¬g- uration. This command is available in Conï¬guration Menu of the boot con- sole interface. NOTICE: The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics conï¬guration before you replace your monitor . For information about changing the conï¬guration after you replace your monitor , refer to âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix B. T o display the current graphics and console information, enter the following command; monitor The correct usage for setting the graphics conï¬guration is: monitor graphics_path type where valid graphics_path parameters are: graphics(0) - The built-in 8-plane graphics adapter . graphics(1 ) through graphics(4) - Graphics adapters installed in option slots 1 through 4. and type is the numerical monitor type
190 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype When a dual display graphics adapter (an adapter which has two video out- put connectors) is installed, the video connector on the left (when looking at the system from the rear) is graphics( NA) and the video connector on the right is graphics( NB). Where N is the slot number in which the graphics adapter is installed. For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 3 would be graphics(3A) and graphics(3B). NOTICE: There are graphics conï¬guration restrictions of which you must be aware when adding graphics adapters or reconï¬guring your graphics devices. For details on graphics conï¬guration restrictions, see the subsection â Graphics Configuration Restrictionsâ in Appendix B. Displaying the Current Monitor Configuration T o display the current monitor conï¬guration for your system from the Con- ï¬guration Menu of the boot console interface, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, enter: Main Menu: Enter command > configuration This places you in the Conï¬guration Menu. From here, enter: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor The screen displays a list of the current graphics adapters and their monitor types conï¬gured for your workstation. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class ----------- ---- ---- -------- ---------- ---- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 75Hz 12 Configuration Menu: Enter command > In this example, only the built-in graphic adapter graphics(0) is conï¬gured. The monitor type for graphics(0) is set to type 12, which is a 1280 by 1024 monitor that uses a frequency of 75 Hz.
191 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Setting the Monitor Type Y ou can set the monitor type for a graphics adapter by entering the follow- ing: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics( n) tt Where n is the number of the graphics adapter and tt is the monitor type. T o display a list of supported monitors, enter the following command; Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor list A list of valid monitor types similar to the following is displayed; MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 1 1280x1024 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 2 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 3 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 4 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 5 1024x768 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 6 800x600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 7 640x480 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 8 1600x1200 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 9 1600x1200 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 10 1200x1600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 11 1200x1600 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 75Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 13 1280x1024 75Hz Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 14 640x480 60Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 15 --------user defined------- Configuration Menu: Enter command >
192 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype T o set the monitor type for graphics(0) to monitor type 2, enter the follow- ing; Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 This will take effect on the next reboot. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class ----------- ---- ---- -------- ---------- ---- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 75Hz 2 The boot console displays a message that tells you that your new monitor selection will take affect the next time you reboot your system. The boot console also displays the new monitor information. T rying to change the monitor type to a number not listed for that graphics device fails and gives you the following warning message: Value of monitor type n out of range (n - nn) T rying to change the monitor type on an empty slot fails and gives you the following warning message: No such graphics card. Changing the monitor type to 0 forces the system to poll for monitor type during the next time your reboot your system.
193 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Setting the Monitor Type at Power On If you replace your workstationâs monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâs graphics parameters by using the monitor com- mand before doing so, you need to perform the following: If your keyboard connects to the PS/2 connector on your system, wait 2 sec- onds after the Num Lock light ï¬ashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. NOTICE: It takes approximately one to two minutes after powering on the workstation before the Num Lock light ï¬ashes. If you have a keyboard that connects to the HIL connector on your system, press T ab every three seconds during the boot sequence to initiate the auto- matic monitor selection process. The system cycles through all of the available monitor types one at a time. When you can see a message similar to the following clearly and legigbly , select that monitor type by pressing Enter . MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ----------- ---- ---- ---- ---------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 n nnnnxnnnn nnHz Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type (type n of n types). The system queries you to conï¬rm your selection. Press Y to save this mon- itor type. If you press any key other than Y , the following message is displayed: Monitor type not saved. At this point, the new monitor type is active, but not saved. Because you didnât save the monitor type, the next time you reboot the system the original monitor type will be used. Next, the following message is displayed: To select a new Graphics Monitor Type press the <TAB> key now, otherwise EXIT by entering any other key (or will time out in 15 seconds)... T o restart the monitor selection process, press T AB .
194 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Changing the Console to External Terminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the fol- lowing procedure to display to console to an external terminal: 1 Turn system power off. 2 Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3 Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the top serial connector) on the system rear panel. 4 Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
195 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Displaying the Current Memory Configuration The following sample screen output using the memory command shows: ï¬rst, a memory conï¬guration table with properly-installed and conï¬gured memory (Sample Output 1); and second, output when a SIMM has been improperly installed (Sample Output 2). T o display the current memory conï¬guration for your system, from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, type: Main Menu: Enter command > information This places you in the Information Menu. From here type: Information Menu: Enter command > memory The screen displays status and conï¬guration information for the memory DIMMs installed in your workstation. The ï¬rst listing below shows the memory information for a system with correctly installed and conï¬gured memory modules. The second listing shows the information for a system that has memory modules incorrectly installed of conï¬gured.
196 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Memory Information Sample 1 The following sample shows the memory information when memory mod- ules are properly installed and conï¬gured MEMORY INFORMATION MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ---- --------- ------ 0a/b 64MB Configured 1a/b 32MB Configured 2a/b 128MB Configured --------- TOTAL 224MB DETAILED MEMORY CONFIGURATION TABLE SPA GROUP SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status Size Slot --- ----- --- ---------- ---- ----------- ---- ---- 0x00000000 1 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0 Configured 3 Configured 64MB 0a/b 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0x0c000000 0 2 Configured 0 Configured 16MB 1a/b 2 Configured 2 Configured 16MB 1a/b Group 1 interleaved 2 ways over 3 banks Group 0 interleaved 2 ways over 2 banks BAD MEMORY TABLE SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status SIMM Size Slot --- ---------- ---- ----------- --------- ---- 0 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 1 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 0a/b 2 Present 1 Not Present 0MB 3a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 3a/b Active, installed memory (bytes) : 234881024 of Standard DRAM Deallocated pages (bytes) - 0 ----------- Available Memory (bytes) : 234881024 Good Memory Required by OS (bytes): 0 (Not Set by OS) Memory HVERSION SVERSION -------- ---------- 0x0710 0x0900
197 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Memory Information Sample 2 The following sample shows the memory information when memory mod- ules are not properly installed and conï¬gured. In this sample the memory module in memory slot 1A is missing. MEMORY INFORMATION WARNING: Memory has been reconfigured due to a physical change or because the Page Deallocation Table (PDT) was cleared. This is for information only. No action is required. MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ---- --------- ------ 0a/b 64MB Configured 1a/b ??MB SIMM not seated properly. 2a/b 128MB Configured --------- TOTAL 192MB DETAILED MEMORY CONFIGURATION TABLE SPA GROUP SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status Size Slot --- ----- --- ---------- ---- ----------- ---- ---- 0x00000000 0 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0 Configured 3 Configured 64MB 0a/b 1 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b Group 0 interleaved 2 ways over 3 banks BAD MEMORY TABLE SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status SIMM Size Slot --- ---------- ---- ----------- --------- ---- 0 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 1 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 0a/b 2 Present 0 Sizing Error 0MB 1a/b 1 Not Present 0MB 3a/b 2 Sizing Error 0MB 1a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 3a/b Active, installed memory (bytes) : 201326592 of Standard DRAM Deallocated pages (bytes) - 0 ----------- Available Memory (bytes) : 201326592 Good Memory Required by OS (bytes): 0 (Not Set by OS) Memory HVERSION SVERSION -------- ---------- 0x0710 0x0900
198 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Status of the System I/O Displaying the Status of the System I/O The IO command lets you identify all built-in I/O devices and optional I/O devices installed in the option slots. It is available in the Information Menu. T o use the IO command from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, type: Information Menu: Enter command > IO Information about the built-in and optional I/O devices is displayed. An example from a C160 or C180 workstation is listed below . I/O MODULE INFORMATION IODC IODC Path Decimal Type Location HVER SVER Vers Dep ------------ ------- ------------------------- ---------- ---- ---- ---- ---- 8/0 8/0 Bus Bridge built-in 6800 0a00 0x00 0x00 FWSCSI 8/12 A DMA I/O built-in 03b0 8980 0x96 0x00 8/16 8/16 Bus Adapter built-in 03b0 8100 0x00 0x00 8/16/0 8/16/0 Parallel built-in 03b0 7400 0x00 0x00 8/16/1 8/16/1 Audio built-in 03b4 7b00 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_1 8/16/4 RS232 built-in 03b0 8c00 0x01 0x00 SESCSI 8/16/5 SE SCSI built-in 03b0 8200 0x96 0x00 LAN 8/16/6 LAN built-in 03b0 8a00 0x02 0x00 PS2 8/16/7 Keyboard built-in 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/8 8/16/8 Mouse built-in 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/10 8/16/10 Floppy built-in 03b0 8300 0x00 0x00 8/20 8/20 Bus Adapter built-in 0170 8e00 0x00 0x00 HIL 8/20/1 HIL built-in 0170 7300 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_2 8/20/2 RS232 Port built-in 0170 8c00 0x00 0x00 EISA 8/20/5 Bus Adapter built-in 0170 9000 0x00 0x00 GRAPHICS(0) 8/24 INTERNAL_EG_X128 built-in 0160 8500 0x01 0x00 8/63 8/63 Bus Converter built-in 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 10/63 10/63 Bus Converter built-in 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 EISA Cards Path Type EISA ID ---- ---- ------- 8/20/5/1 EISA slot is empty 8/20/5/2 EISA slot is empty 8/20/5/3 EISA slot is empty PCI Cards Slot Path Bus Class ---- -------------------------------- --- ------------------
199 The Boot Console Interface Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags auto boot and auto sear ch are variables stored in your workstationâ s non- volatile memory . (Nonvolatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset these ï¬ags to new value, the change takes ef fect the next time you reboot the workstation. auto boot boots the operating system whenever your workstation is turned on. T o examine the state of the auto boot and auto search ï¬ags, type the fol- lowing at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto If auto boot is set to on , your workstation automatically attempts to boot the operating system when turned on. If auto boot is set to off, your workstation enters the boot administration mode of the boot console user interface. The state of the auto sear ch ï¬ag determines how your workstation seeks a boot device during autoboot. If auto sear ch is set to on , your workstation will search for other boot devices if the primary boot device is not available. If auto search is off , your workstation will default to the boot administration mode if it canât see the primary boot device. T o change the state of the auto boot or auto search ï¬ags, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto boot state or Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto search state where state is on or off.
200 The Boot Console Interface Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags Autosearch searches for devices in the following order: Primary boot path Alternate boot path Built-in fast, wide SCSI devices (or ultra, wide SCSI on C200 /C240) GSC card in slot 1 PCI card in slot 1 GSC card in slot 2 PCI card in slot 2 GSC card in slot 3 PCI card in slot 3 GSC card in slot 4 PCI card in slot 4 Built-in single-ended SCSI devices Built-in LAN bootp servers NOTICE: SCSI adapter option cards installed in the option slots are not searched unless they are referenced by the primary or alternate boot paths. EISA cards are not searched.
201 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Security Mode Displaying and Setting the Security Mode The SECur e ï¬ag is a variable stored in non-volatile memory . (Non-volatil- memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset this ï¬ag to a new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot the workstation. When the SECur e ï¬ag is set to on , autoboot and autosearch are enabled and cannot be stopped. The system boots from the default boot paths regard- less of user intervention. T o display the current setting for the SECure ï¬ag, enter the following com- mand: secure T o set the SECure ï¬ag on or off, enter one of the following: secure on secure off
202 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode When fastboot is enabled (set to on), your workstation does a quick check of the memory and skips I/O interface testing, and processor and cache self- testing during its power-on self tests. This enables your workstation to com- plete its boot process quicker . The default factory setting is for fastboot to be enabled ( on). The fastboot mode allows your workstation to boot quickly by performing a less extensive check of the systemâ s memory . When fastboot is disabled (set to off), more extensive memory testing and I/O interface testing is performed during the self tests, causing the boot pro- cess to take longer . If you are experiencing difï¬culty in booting your workstation, set fastboot to off and reboot the system. The more extensive testing may reveal the error condition. T o display the status of fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot T o disable fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot off T o enable fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot on
203 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the LAN Station Address Displaying the LAN Station Address It is sometimes necessary to supply a LAN station address of your worksta- tion to other users. For example, if your workstation is to become a member of a cluster , the cluster administrator needs to know your LAN station address in order to add your workstation to the cluster . A LAN station address of your workstation is the label that uniquely identi- ï¬es the LAN connection for your workstation at the link level (the hardware level). T o display your workstationâ s LAN station addresses, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > lanaddress The LAN station address is displayed as a twelve-digit number in hexadeci- mal notation, similar to the following: LAN Station Addresses: 080009-789abc The address is for the systemâ s built-in LAN.
204 The Boot Console Interface Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings Configure and Display LAN Settings The LanConï¬g command conï¬gures and displays the current LAN settings. The C180, C200, C240 and C360 systems support 10Base-T , 100Base-T and AUI standards. T o automatically select the network speed (100 Mbits/sec or 10 Mbits/sec) and data transfer operation (full or half duplex) , operating in compliance with IEEE 802.3u , type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUTO_detect T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Half_dx T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Full_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Half_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Full_dx T o select the AUI port (10 Mbits/sec, half duplex only), type the following at the prompt:
205 The Boot Console Interface Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUI NOTE: The LAN setting defaults to LAN-TP(RJ45). If that setting fails, the system tries the LAN-AUI setting. Also note that the new lan configuration settings take effect at the next BOot or SEArch command.
206 The Boot Console Interface Displaying System Information Displaying System Information The all command allows you to display the systemâ s processor revision and speed, cache size, memory size, ï¬ag settings, and the boot and console paths. T o display system information from the Information Menu, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > all This information is paged to allow you to view it as necessary .
207 The Boot Console Interface Displaying PIM Information Displaying PIM Information The pim command allows you to display the most recent PIM information for the speciï¬ed fault type. T o display PIM information for a speciï¬c fault, from the Service Menu, type the following at the prompt: Service Menu: Enter command > pim processor_number Y ou can use pim in the following ways: pim - gives all fault types pim 0 - HPMC information on processor pim 0 fault_type - fault type information on processor
208 The Boot Console Interface Displaying PIM Information
209 Glossary absolute pathname The full pathname of a file, including all the directories leading to it, starting with the root direc- tory (â/â) and ending with the filename itself. See also file, filename, path- name . access permissions Settings that allow a user or group of users to read, write, or execute files. See also file access per- missions . active window The window that is re- ceiving input from the keyboard at the present time. If there is no active win- dow, anything you type is lost. Only one window can be active at a time. The ac- tive window is said to have the âkey- board focus.â ANSI The American National Stan- dards Institute, a non-profit organization, made up of various expert committees, that publishes standards for use by na- tional industries. ANSI has adopted the IEEE standards for local area networks. argument The part of a command line that identifies the file or directory to be acted on. attachment unit interface (AUI) A transceiver cable that conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications. back up v. To make a copy of the file system on a tape or disk that can be stored separately from the original files. Also called âbacking up the systemâ or simply âsystem backup.â bitmap Generally speaking, an array of data bits used for graphic images. Strict- ly speaking, a pixmap of depth one, ca- pable of representing 2-color images. boot Short for bootstrap service . A ser- vice provided by a short program, stored in the read-only memory of your work- station, that loads the operating system (or any complex program) into main memory. Partner workstations provide bootstrap service to diskless worksta- tions. See also boot ROM. boot console interface The interactive firmware that enables you to interact with the hardware of your workstation before the workstation boots the operat- ing system. The boot console interface allows you to perform special tasks, dis- play information, and set certain system parameters. boot ROM A read-only memory that is incorporated into a workstation for the purpose of starting the operating system, testing the terminal, and producing a standard display. bootstrap service See boot . byte A fundamental character-code unit, usually consisting of 8 bits. CD-ROM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory. See also CD-ROM disc, CD- ROM drive . CD-ROM disc CD-ROM discs are identical to the audio compact discs (CDs) used to record stereo music, ex- cept that they store data. CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 inches) in diameter, and use one data surface with a capacity of 600 MB. The data surface contains pits
210 Glossary and flat spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. CD-ROM drive A random-access, read-only, mass-storage device that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for read- ing data optically and an embedded con- troller with a SCSI interface. Central Processing Unit (CPU) The part of a workstation that interprets and executes instructions. child directory See subdirectory . click To press and release a mouse but- ton. The term comes from the fact that pressing and releasing most mouse but- tons makes a clicking sound. cluster A group of workstations con- nected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server, per- forms as a file-system server for the clus- ter clients. See also cluster client, cluster node , cluster server . cluster client A cluster node that does not have a local HP-UX file system. Its file system resides on the cluster server. See also cluster , cluster node , cluster server . cluster node A member of a group of workstations connected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server, performs as a server to the cluster. See also cluster , cluster client , cluster server . cluster server A workstation that pro- vides file access, login access, file trans- fer, printing, and other services across a network to a defined cluster of systems (cluster nodes) connected via a LAN. See also cluster , cluster client , cluster node , host . command An instruction that you enter into the system at a prompt, to execute a program or perform a task. See also shell command . command argument Information you provide on a command line to describe the object (usually a file or directory) to be operated on by the command. command interpreter A program that reads lines of text from standard input (typed at the keyboard or read from a file) and interprets them as requests to execute other programs. An HP-UX command interpreter is called a shell. See also shell . command option Information you pro- vide on a command line to indicate any special action you want the command to take. See also default . configuration The arrangement of a workstation or network as defined by the nature, number, and chief characteristics of its functional units. More specifically, the term configuration may refer to a hardware configuration or a software configuration. control key sequence A keystroke combination used as a shorthand way of specifying commands. To enter a control key sequence, you hold down the control
Glossary 21 1 key while pressing another key. cpu See Central Processing Unit . CRX color graphics Expanded graph- ics capability offering 24-plane color, 24-plane Z-buffered color, or 48-plane Z-buffered color capability. current directory See current work- ing directory . current session The work and process- es that have been created since you logged into the system (and before you log out again). See also session. current working directory The direc- tory in which a relative path name search begins, as well as the directory in which you are currently working. It is also called the working directory or current directory. cursor The small blinking box dis- played in whatever screen is active at a particular time. The cursor marks your current typing position on the screen and indicates which program (HP VUE ter- minal window or shell) will receive your commands. daisy-chaining A method of connect- ing devices where the signal passes from one device to the next in serial fashion along a bus. DDS tape drive A device that stores data on Digital Data Storage (DDS) cas- settes. default Most commands give you a choice of one or more options. If you donât specify an option, the command automatically assigns one. This automat- ic option is called the default. See also command option . dialog box A special type of HP VUE screen that is called by the user from a window. Dialog boxes contain controls and settings. To display an example of a dialog box, click the Style Manager but- ton on the Workspace, then click on Col- or. directory A special type of object that contains information about the objects beneath it in the HP-UX organizational structure. Basically, it is a file that stores names and links to files and other direc- tories. See also file. disk A thin, round plate with a magnetic surface coating on which data is stored by magnetic recording. See also floppy diskette , hard disk , CD-ROM disc . disked workstation A workstation that has its own hard disk drive. See also diskless workstation , node , partner node , workstation . diskette See floppy diskette . diskless booting Loading the operating system into local memory from the disk of a partner workstation. diskless workstation A workstation that has no disk. A diskless workstation can use the disk of its partner worksta- tion or other workstations. If necessary, it can also use the computational services of the partner workstation or other work-
212 Glossary stations. A diskless workstation boots from its partner workstation. See also disked workstation , node , partner node , workstation . double click To press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. drag To press and hold down a mouse button while moving the mouse (and the pointer on the screen). See also drop. drive See CD-ROM drive , DDS tape drive , floppy drive , hard disk drive . drop To release an icon that has been âdraggedâ to a new position. See also drag . EISA (Extended Industry Standard Architecture) An industry standard bus architecture based on and compatible with that used by IBM in their AT series computers. environment The conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory, and default search paths. See also environ- ment variables . environment variables The set of de- fined shell variables (some of which are PATH, TERM, SHELL, EXINIT, HOME) that define the conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory, and default search paths. See also environ- ment . ETHERNET The LAN developed jointly by Digital Equipment Corpora- tion, Intel, and Xerox Corporation, upon which the IEEE 802.3 network is based. fast, differential SCSI An 8-bit wide bus with high-power receivers and driv- ers, which allows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 10 MB per second. See also fast-wide differential SCSI , single-ended standard SCSI , Small Computer System Interface, ul- tra, wide, single-ended SCSI . fast-wide differential SCSI A 16-bit wide bus with high-power receivers and drivers, which allows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 20 MB per second. See also fast, differen- tial SCSI , single-ended standard SC- SI , Small Computer System Interface, ultra, wide, single-ended SCSI . file The basic named unit of data stored on disk. See also directory, filename. file access permissions The access rights given to a particular file or directo- ry. Every file and directory has a set of access permissions, a code that deter- mines whether a process can perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening the file or writing to it). See also access permissions . File Manager The HP VUE application that allows you to manage your files and directories, and to set viewing preferenc- es. filename The name given to a particular file. See also absolute pathname , file , pathname .
Glossary 213 file server A workstation whose prima- ry task is to control the storage and re- trieval of data from hard disks. Any number of other workstations can be linked to the file server in order to use it to access data. file system The organized set of files and directories on a hard disk. firmware The control software that is embedded in ROM and is always resi- dent despite the status of the operating system. It handles the booting of the sys- tem, initialization of I/O, and starts the loading of the operating system. floppy diskette A thin, record-shaped plate that stores data on its magnetic sur- faces. The system uses heads (similar to heads in tape recorders) to read and write data on concentric disk tracks. floppy drive A device that stores data on a flexible diskette. hard disk A type of disk that is rigid as opposed to a floppy diskette, which is flexible. hard disk drive A device that stores data on a hard disk. The hard disk is a permanent part of the drive and cannot be removed. HCRX color graphics Accelerated 8- plane or 24-plane graphics. See also CRX color graphics . Help Manager The HP VUE applica- tion that provides online help. $HOME The environment variable rep- resenting the home directory. This is the directory in which you are placed after you log in. Typically, this is /users/ login , where login is your username. See also home directory . home directory A shorthand way of re- ferring to a frequently used directory, al- most always the login directory. host See cluster server . host name See internet protocol ad- dress . HP-UX cluster See cluster node , clus- ter server . HP Visual User Environment A user interface that draws a graphical layer over the complexities of the other layers of the system (the hardware, operating system, and X Window system), en- abling you to control your workstation by directly manipulating graphical ob- jects instead of by typing commands at a command-line prompt. HP VUE See HP Visual User Envi- ronment . icon A small, graphic representation of an object. Objects can be âiconizedâ (turned into icons) to clear a cluttered workspace. Icons can be restored to their original appearance when needed. What- ever processes are executing in an object continue to execute when the object is iconized. iconify See iconize .
214 Glossary iconize To turn a window or shell into an icon. See also icon. Initial System Loader The program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. input device Any of several pieces of hardware equipment used to give infor- mation to a system. Examples are the keyboard and the mouse. See also out- put device . input window The window that dis- plays a programâs prompt and any com- mands typed but not yet executed. internet protocol address (IP ad- dress) A string of characters that uniquely identifies a workstation in a network. Also referred to as the IP ad- dress, the system name, and the host name. invisible filename A filename in which the first character is a dot (.). Invisible filenames are not displayed by the listing commands such as ls and ll without add options, such as -a. IP address See internet protocol ad- dress . ISL See Initial System Loader . kernel The part of the operating system that is an executable piece of code re- sponsible for managing the computerâs resources. The kernel controls the rest of the operating system. LAN See local area network . LAN station address See local area network station address . link n. A special object that contains the name of another object. When you spec- ify a link as a pathname or part of a path- name, the system substitutes the pathname that the link contains. v. To join together two or more objects. local area network (LAN) A data communications system that allows a number of independent devices to com- municate with each other. The systems and clusters that share data, hardware, and software resources via Networking Services software. local area network system address The label that uniquely identifies the lo- cal area network (LAN) connection for your workstation at the hardware level. log in To initially sign on to the system so that you may begin to use it. This cre- ates your first user process. See also username . login directory The directory in which you are placed when you log in, usually your home directory. See also home di- rectory . Login Manager The program that con- trols the initial startup of HP VUE and accepts the userâs username and pass- word. login script The shell program that runs at each login, and sets the login environ- ment for your system.
Glossary 215 menu bar An area at the top or bottom of a window that contain the titles of the pull-down or pop-up menus for that ap- plication. minimize button In HP VUE, a push button on the window frame that turns a screen into an icon. See also icon, iconize . mouse pointer See pointer . name A character string associated with a file, directory, or link. A name can in- clude various alphanumeric characters, but never a slash (/) or null character. See also pathname . network Two or more workstations sharing information. See also cluster, workstation . network controller A printed circuit board that passes bit streams between the network and the main memory of the workstation. Coupled with the network transceiver, the controller also handles signal processing, encoding, and net- work media access. node A network computer (worksta- tion). Each node in the network can use the data, programs, and devices of other network nodes. Each node contains main memory and has its own disk or shares one with another node. See also disked workstation , diskless workstation , workstation . node name A unique identifying name given to a workstation in a cluster. See also cluster , node . nonvolatile memory System memory that retains its contents even after work- station power is turned off. object Any file, directory, or link in the network. See also directory , file , link , pathname . operating system The program that su- pervises the execution of other programs on your workstation. For example, the entire HP-UX system, including the ker- nel and all HP-UX commands. See also kernel . option See command option . output device Any of several pieces of hardware used for receiving messages from the workstation. Display screens and printers are examples of output de- vices. See also input device. output window The window that dis- plays a process response to your com- mand. parent directory A directory that con- tains other directories, each of which is then called a subdirectory. See also sub- directory . partner node A workstation that shares its disk with a diskless node. See also diskless workstation . password The word you enter next to the password prompt at login time. Keep your password secret and change it occa- sionally in order to protect your account from unauthorized use. See also user ac- count .
216 Glossary path The hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. pathname A series of names separated by slashes that describe the path of the operating system from some starting point in the network to a destination ob- ject. Pathnames begin with the name of the starting point, and include every di- rectory name between the starting point and the destination object. A pathname ends with the name of the destination ob- ject. See also name, object . permissions A set of rights (read, write, execute) associated with an object in the file system. Determines who may use the object. PID Process Identification. Also re- ferred to as a process ID. See also pro- cess ID . pointer Sometimes called the âmouse pointer,â the pointer shows the mouse lo- cation on the screen. The pointerâs shape depends on its location. In the HP VUE Workspace, the pointer is an X. On a window frame, the pointer is an arrow. process A computing environment in which you may execute programs; a pro- gram currently running in the system. process ID A unique identification number assigned to all processes by the operating system. Also referred to as a PID. See also PID. program A unit of executable code, in binary or âsourceâ form. Most HP-UX commands and routines consist of pro- grams. prompt A message or symbol displayed by the system to let you know that it is ready for your input. push button A graphic control that simulates a real-life push button. Use the pointer and mouse to push the button and immediately start an action. RAM Random access memory. ROM Read-only memory. root See superuser . scroll bar A vertical or horizontal bar located on the side or bottom of a win- dow that allows the user to view infor- mation that does not fit within the window. SCSI See Small Computer System In- terface . server A program that controls all ac- cess to input and output devices. session The time between when you log in and when you log out. Also called a work session or a login session. See also current session . shell A command-line interpreter pro- gram used to invoke utility programs. Some examples of HP-UX shells are the Bourne, Korn, Key, and C shells. Some- times referred to as a command interpret- er. See also command interpreter . shell command An instruction you
Glossary 217 give the system to execute a utility pro- gram or shell script. See also shell script , utility program . shell script A file that contains com- mands that the system can interpret and run in a shell. shutdown The process of taking the system from multi-user state to system administration state. SIMM See Single In-line Memory Module . single-ended standard SCSI An 8-bit wide SCSI bus with standard receivers and drivers, which limits total cable length to 6 meters. See also fast, differ- ential SCSI , fast-wide, differential SC- SI , Small Computer System Interface, ultra, wide, single-ended SCSI . Single In-line Memory Module A memory board. slider One of the components of a scroll bar. The slider is the object that is dragged along the scroll area to cause a change. Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) An IEEE standard for interfac- ing a computer to multiple, disparate high-speed peripherals such as a floppy disk or a CD-ROM, singly or in combi- nation. See also fast, differential SCSI , fast-wide SCSI , single-ended standard SCSI . standalone A workstation that is not part of a cluster. See also cluster. Style Manager The HP VUE applica- tion that provides the ability to custom- ize various aspects of your system, including colors, fonts, the keyboard, the mouse, session startup and termination behavior, and access to other worksta- tions. subdirectory A directory that is located in, or anywhere on a path below, another directory. The directory above the subdi- rectory is called the parent directory. The subdirectory is also referred to as the child directory. See also parent directo- ry . superuser A user with permission to enter the top-level directory and make changes to files and programs that users are not allowed to change. To âbecome superuserâ or âbecome rootâ means to let the system know that you are now as- suming the role of system administrator. You can do this either by logging into the system as root, or by typing su at a com- mand-line prompt. You must know the root password to become root . system administrator The person re- sponsible for system and network instal- lation, updating, maintenance, and security at your site. system call Invocation of a kernel pro- cess by a user program. system name See internet protocol address . terminal window A terminal window is a type of HP VUE window that emu- lates a complete display terminal. Termi- nal windows are typically used to fool
218 Glossary non-client programs into believing they are running in their favorite terminal. When not running programs or execut- ing operating system commands, termi- nal windows display the command-line prompt. See also HP Visual User Envi- ronment . title bar The rectangular area between the top of the window and the window frame, that contains the title of the win- dow object. transceiver A device that transmits and receives signals. ultra, wide, single-ended SCSI A 16- bit wide bus with standard receivers and drivers, which limits cable lengths to a total of 3 meters. See also fast wide dif- ferential SCSI, Small Computer Sys- tem Interface . user account The system administrator defines a user account for every person authorized to use the system. Each user account contains the name the computer uses to identify the person (user ID), and the personâs password. User accounts also contain project and organization names, to help the system determine who can use the system and what resources each person or organization can use. See also user ID , password . user ID The name the computer uses to identify you. Your system administrator assigns you a user ID. Enter your user ID during the login procedure when the sys- tem displays the login prompt. See also user account . username The name that the system recognizes as uniquely yours. Also known as your login name. The user- name is also the name that identifies you to the mail system and other software re- quiring secure entry. utility See utility program . utility program A program provided with the operating system to perform a frequently required task, such as printing a file or displaying the contents of a di- rectory. See also command, shell com- mand . window A rectangular area of the screen for viewing information. HP VUE allows you to create several types of win- dows on the screen. Each window is a separate computing environment in which you may execute programs, edit text, or read text. See also Workspace Manager . Window Manager The HP VUE pro- gram that controls the size, placement, and operation of windows. working directory See current work- ing directory . Workspace What the screen becomes when you start HP VUE. Although you can hide the workspace under terminal windows or other graphic objects, you can never position anything behind the workspace. All windows and graphic ob- jects appear stacked on the workspace. See also HP Visual User Environment , terminal window . Workspace Manager The program that controls the size, placement, and op-
Glossary 219 eration of windows on the HP VUE Workspace. The Workspace Manager is a special Window Manager. See also Window Manager . workstation A compact, graphics-ori- ented computer having high speed and high memory capacity. A workstation usually includes a keyboard, a monitor, and a system unit. See also node, disked workstation , diskless workstation.
220 Glossary
Index 221 Symbols $HOME,, 213 A absolute pathname,, 209 access permissions,, 209 active window,, 209 ANSI,, 209 archiving data listing files,, 56 restoring files,, 56 saving to a cassette,, 55 archiving data,, 55 argument,, 209 attachment unit interface (AUI),, 209 audio CODEC, 16 features, 15 headphone jack, 7 IN,, 14 input, 15 microphone jack, 7 mute button, 7 OUT,, 14 outpu, 15 volume control, 7 auto boot,, 199 auto boot, changing state,, 199 auto search,, 199 auto search, changing state,, 199 auto-negotiation failure, 75 B back up,, 209 bitmap,, 209 boot console accessing,, 182 features,, 177 menus,, 177 boot console interface,, 209 boot failure dealing with, 83 boot ROM,, 209 boot,, 209 bootable media searching for,, 185 bootstrap service,, 209 byte,, 209 C CD-ROM disc busy light during self test,, 39 mounting and unmounting,, 36 mounting using SAM,, 36 unmounting using SAM,, 38 CD-ROM disc,, 209 CD-ROM discs caring for,, 28 CD-ROM drive controls and features, 8 controls and features,, 25 description,, 25 troubleshooting,, 41 verifying operation,, 35 CD-ROM drive,, 210 CD-ROM media,, 28 CD-ROM,, 209 Central Processing Unit (CPU),, 210 child directory,, 210 click,, 210 cluster client,, 210 cluster node,, 210 cluster server,, 210 cluster,, 210 command argument,, 210 command interpreter,, 210 command option,, 210 command,, 210 commands all,, 206 auto,, 199 boot,, 183 cd,, 66 eisa,, 198 fastboot,, 202, 204, 205 lanaddress,, 203 mediainit,, 65 memory,, 195 path,, 187 pim,, 207 reset,, 186 search,, 185 tar,, 55 configuration,, 210 control key sequence,, 210 controls, power LED, 6 controls, system unit, 5â12 audio, 7 LEDs, 6 power switch, 5 storage device, 8 cpu,, 211 CRX color graphics,, 211 current directory,, 211 current working directory,, 211 cursor,, 211 D daisy-chaining,, 211 data cassettes cleaning heads,, 50 media life,, 49 media restrictions,, 50 ordering information,, 58 setting write-protect tab,, 51 DDS tape drive controls and indicators,, 10, 45 LED code warning conditions high humidity,, 48 media wear,, 48 selft-test,, 48 LED codes,, 47 loading and unloading data cassette,, 52 troubleshooting,, 58 using device files,, 54, 64 verifying operation,, 53 DDS tape drive,, 211 DDS tape drives operating,, 52 default,, 211 devices boot failures and, 83 dialog box,, 211 directory,, 211 disk,, 211 disked workstation,, 211 diskette,, 211 diskettes ordering information,, 70 diskless booting,, 211 diskless workstation,, 211 documentation conventions, xvi
222 Index double click,, 212 drag,, 212 drive,, 212 drop,, 212 E EISA option board installing,, 136 EISA slots displaying status,, 198 EISA,, 212 electrostatic discharge (ESD) precatuions,, 94 emissions regulations Federal Communications Commission (FCC),, 92 third party compliance,, 93 environment variables,, 212 environment,, 212 ETHERNET,, 212 F fast, differential SCSI,, 212 fastboot disabling,, 202 displaying status,, 202, 204 enabling,, 202 fastboot,, 202 fast-wide SCSI,, 212 file access permissions,, 212 File Manager,, 212 file server,, 213 file system,, 213 file,, 212 filename,, 212 floor stand, removing,, 103 floppy disk drive controls and features, 12 floppy diskette formatting,, 65 inserting and removing,, 62 listing files,, 67 restoring files from,, 66 saving files to,, 66 setting write-protect,, 61 transferring data,, 66 floppy diskette,, 213 floppy drive operating,, 63 verifying configuration,, 63 floppy drive,, 213 floppy driver configuring,, 69 G GSC option board installing,, 136 H hard disk drive configuring,, 120 hard disk drive,, 213 hard disk,, 213 HCRX color graphics,, 213 Help Manager,, 213 home directory,, 213 host name,, 213 host,, 213 HP Visual User Environment,, 213 HP VUE,, 213 HP-UX cluster,, 213 I icon,, 213 iconify,, 213 iconize,, 214 Initial System Loader,, 214 input device,, 214 input window,, 214 internal storage configuring, 106 internet protocol address,, 214 invisible filename,, 214 IP address,, 214 ISL,, 214 K kernel,, 214 keyboard PS2, 17 L LAN auto-negotiation, 204 cabling, 75 setting, 204 settings, 75 LAN station address,, 203, 214 LAN station address,displaying,, 203 LAN,, 214 link,, 214 local area network system address,, 214 local area network,, 214 log in,, 214 login directory,, 214 Login Manager,, 214 login script,, 214 M main tray assembly removing,, 122 replacing,, 124 memory displaying configuration,, 195 installing additional,, 126 nonvolatile,, 199 menu bar,, 215 minimize button,, 215 monitor, 20 changing type,, 148 displaying type,, 189, 190 setting type at power on, 193 setting type at power on,, 148 setting type from boot console,, 148 setting type,, 191 mouse pointer,, 215 N name,, 215 network auto-negotiation failure, 75 network controller,, 215 network,, 215 node name,, 215 node,, 215 nonvolatile memory,, 199, 215 O object,, 215 operating system, 22 operating system,, 215 option,, 215 ordering information cleaning cassettes,, 58
Index 223 data cassettes,, 58 diskettes,, 70 output device,, 215 output window,, 215 P parent directory,, 215 partner node,, 215 password,, 215 path displaying,, 187 setting,, 188 path,, 187, 216 pathname,, 216 permissions,, 216 PID,, 216 PIM information,displaying,, 207 pointer,, 216 pointing devices, 21 problems 802.3 network,, 75 loading and booting the operating sys- tem,, 74 system power up,, 73 using CD-ROM drive,, 77 using DDS tape drive,, 78 using floppy disk drive,, 79 using hard disk drive,, 76 problems, questions, and suggestions, xvii process ID,, 216 process,, 216 Processor performance,, 3 program,, 216 prompt,, 216 push button,, 216 R RAM,, 216 rear panel connectors, system unit, 13â19, ??â19 audio, 14, 15 network, 17 parallel I/O, 17 power cord, 19 RS-232 serial I/O, 18 SCSI, 19 TOC, 19 regulations acoustics,, 94 laser safety statement,, 96 safety statement,, 95 related manuals, xv release documents, xiv revision history, xv ROM,, 216 root,, 216 S scroll bar,, 216 SCSI bus differences,, 153 fast, wide differential SCSI-3 length,, 163, 165 fast, wide differential,, 153 single-ended SCSI-2 length,, 161 single-ended,, 153 SCSI device IDs assigning,, 167 fast, wide differential,, 170, 171 single-ended standard system,, 168 SCSI ports connecting to,, 172 SCSI restrictions cables,, 156 configuration constraints,, 159 connectors and terminators,, 158 fast, wide differential SCSI-3 configura- tion constraints,, 160 SCSI,, 216 SCSI, checking the ID,, 101 server,, 216 session,, 216 shell command,, 216 shell script,, 217 shell,, 216 shutdown,, 217 SIMM,, 217 Single In-line Memory Module,, 217 single-ended standard SCSI,, 217 slider,, 217 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI),, 217 standalone,, 217 storage device CD-ROM, 8 floppy disk, 12 storage devices installing,, 105 Style Manager,, 217 subdirectory,, 217 superuser,, 217 system administrator,, 217 system call,, 217 system information,displaying,, 206 system name,, 217 system verification tests running, 84 T tar command, additional information,, 57 terminal window,, 217 tests running system verification, 84 title bar,, 218 transceiver,, 218 U user account,, 218 user ID,, 218 username,, 218 utility program,, 218 utility,, 218 W warnings and cautions,, 97 Window Manager,, 218 window,, 218 working directory,, 218 Workspace Manager,, 218 Workspace,, 218 workstation booting,, 183 features,, 3 preparing to change configuration,, 103 resetting to predefined parameters, 186 resetting,, 186 Workstation,, 219
224 Index
Copyright  Hewlett-Packard Co. 1998 Printing History First Printing: December 1998 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. NOTICE The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. HEWLETT -P ACKARD W ARRANTY ST A TEMENT HP PRODUCT DURA TION OF W ARRANTY C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 one year 1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period speciï¬ed above. If HP receive notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like-new . 2. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period speciï¬ed above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. 3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninter- rupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. 4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in per- formance or may have been subject to incidental use.
iii 5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of instal- lation if installed by HP . If customer schedules installation or causes instal- lation by HP to be delayed more than 30 days after delivery , warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery . 6. W arranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inade- quate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP , (c) unauthorized modiï¬cation or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental speciï¬cations for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. 7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LA W , THE ABOVE W AR- RANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER W ARRANTY OR CON- DITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALL Y DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED W AR- RANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY , SA TISF AC- TOR Y QUALITY , AND FITNESS FOR A P AR TICULAR PURPOSE. 8. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the sub- ject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product. 9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LA W , THE REMEDIES IN THIS W ARRANTY ST A TEMENT ARE CUSTOMER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICA TED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DA T A OR FOR DIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DA T A), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT , TOR T , OR OTHER WISE. FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND: THE W ARRANTY TERMS CONT AINED IN THIS ST A TE- MENT , EXCEPT T O THE EXTENT LA WFULL Y PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDA TOR Y ST A TUTOR Y RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copy- right. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written con- sent of Hewlett-Packard Company . RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication, or disclosure by gov- ernment is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in T echnical Data and Computer Software Clause at DF ARS 252.227.7013. Hewlett-Packard Co., 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contents v Preface xiii Audience xiv Safety and Regulatory Statements xiv Release Document(s) xiv Related Manuals xv Revision History xv Documentation Conventions xvi Problems, Questions, and Suggestions xvii 1 Product Information Product Description 3 System Unit Front Panel Controls 5 System Power Switch 5 Power LED 6 System LEDs 6 Audio Controls 7 Storage Device Controls and Features 8 CD-ROM Drive 8 DDS T ape Drive 10 Floppy Disk Drive 12 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 13 Pullout Card 14 Security Loop 14 Audio Connectors 15 PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Connectors 17 HP Parallel I/O Connector 17 802.3 Network Connectors 17 Serial Input/Output Connectors 18
vi Contents SCSI Connectors 19 TOC Button 19 Power Cord Connector 19 Monitors 20 Keyboard 21 Pointing Devices 21 Operating System Overview 22 2 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions 25 CD-ROM Drive 25 Controls and Features 26 CD-ROM Media 28 Caring for CD-ROM Discs 28 Operating the CD-ROM Drive 29 Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM in the Disc T ray 29 Disc T ray Description 29 Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 30 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 31 Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a V ertically Mounted Drive 32 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a V ertically Mounted Drive 34 V erifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation 35 Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 36 Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 36 Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 38 Reading the Busy Light 39 T roubleshooting 41
Contents vii 3 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions 45 DDS Drive 45 Storage Capacities 45 Controls and Indicators 46 LEDs 47 LED W arning Conditions 48 Data Cassettes 49 Media Life 49 Cleaning the T ape Heads 50 Media Restrictions 50 Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Data Cassette 51 Operating the DDS T ape Drive 52 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 52 V erifying the DDS T ape Drive Operation 53 Using Device Files 54 Archiving Data 55 W riting to a Data Cassette 55 Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Y our System 56 Listing the Files on a Data Cassette 56 Further Command Information 57 T roubleshooting 58 Ordering Information 58 4 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette 61 Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Diskette 61 Inserting and Removing a Diskette 62 Operating the Floppy Drive 63 V erifying the Floppy Drive Conï¬guration 63
viii Contents Using Device Files 64 Formatting a New Diskette 65 T ransferring Data T o and From a Floppy Diskette 66 Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette 66 Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Y our System 66 Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette 67 For More Information 68 Conï¬guring the Floppy Driver 69 T roubleshooting 70 Ordering Information 70 5 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions 73 Problems with Powering Up the System 73 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System 74 Problems with the 802.3 Network 75 Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive 76 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive 77 Problems Using the DDS T ape Drive 78 Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive 79 LED Error Codes 80 Dealing with a Boot Failure 83 Running System V eriï¬cation T ests 84 A Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 1 89 Declaration of Conformity 2 90
Contents ix Special V ideo Conï¬guration Statements 91 For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: 91 For FCC Applications: 91 Emissions Regulations 92 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 92 VCCI Class B ITE (Japan) 93 Korea RRL (EMI Class A) 93 Emissions Regulations Compliance 93 Acoustics 94 Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV 94 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions 94 Safety Statement 95 Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) 96 V isible LEDs 96 W arnings and Cautions 97 B Changing Y our W orkstationâs Hardwar e Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs 101 Preparing Y our W orkstation 103 Installing Storage Devices 105 Preparing to Install Y our Storage Device 106 Conï¬guring your Storage Device 106 Determining Y our Storage Devices Position 106 Storage Device Cable Routing 108 Removing the Storage T ray 108 Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format T ape Drive 109 Installing a Floppy Drive 1 11
x Contents Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 1 13 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 3 or Position 4 1 15 Replacing the Storage T ray 118 Conï¬guring a Hard Disk Drive 120 Removing the Main T ray Assembly 122 Replacing the Main T ray Assembly 124 Installing Additional Memory 126 Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 130 Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 136 Graphics Adapter Considerations 137 Special V ideo Conï¬guration Statements 137 Graphics Paths 138 Graphics Conï¬guration Restrictions 139 Installing the Option Board 141 Replacing the Battery 146 Changing Y our Monitor T ype 148 Setting the Monitor T ype from the Boot Console Interface 148 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On 148 Changing the Console to External T erminal 149 C SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences 153 SCSI Restrictions 156 Cables 156 Connectors and T erminators 158 SCSI Conï¬guration Constraints 159 Narrow , Single-ended SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 159 Fast, W ide, Differential SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 160
Contents xi Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 160 Determining SCSI Bus Length 161 Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length 161 Fast, W ide Differential SCSI Bus Length 163 Ultra, W ide, Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length 165 Assigning SCSI Device IDs 167 Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs 168 Fast, W ide Differential SCSI IDs (C160/C180/C200 Upgrades) 170 Ultra, W ide SCSI IDs 171 Connecting to the SCSI Ports 172 System SCSI Port Connection 172 D The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features 177 Accessing the Boot Console Interface 182 Booting Y our W orkstation 183 Searching for Bootable Media 185 Resetting Y our W orkstation 186 Displaying and Setting Paths 187 Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype 189 The Monitor Command 189 Displaying the Current Monitor Conï¬guration 190 Setting the Monitor T ype 191 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On 193 Changing the Console to External T erminal 194 Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration 195 Memory Information Sample 1 196
xii Contents Memory Information Sample 2 197 Displaying the Status of the System I/O 198 Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags 199 Displaying and Setting the Security Mode 201 Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode 202 Displaying the LAN Station Address 203 Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings 204 Displaying System Information 206 Displaying PIM Information 207
xiii Preface This owner â s guide describes how to use your HP 9000 C Class workstation. This manual assumes that you have installed your workstation as described in the C Class Har dwar e Installation Car d.
xiv Audience This guide is intended for HP 9000 Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstation users. Safety and Regulatory Statements See Appendix A in the back of this manual for safety and regulatory state- ments that apply to this workstation. Release Document(s) Please refer to the Release Document(s) you received with your system or system software for additional information that we may not have been able to include in this guide at the time of its publication.
xv Related Manuals Refer to the following manuals for more information: ⢠C Class Har dwar e Installation Car d (A4200-90012) ⢠Using Your HP Workstation (A2615-90003) ⢠Installing and Updating HP-UX (B2355-90050) ⢠Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals (B2355-90053) ⢠HP Visual User Environment Userâs Guide (B1171-90079) ⢠Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers: Sharing the HP-UX File System (B2355-90038) T o order manuals, please contact your local sales ofï¬ce. Revision History The revision history for each edition of the manual is listed below: HP Part No. Edition Revision History A4200-90050 E1298 First printing
xvi Documentation Conventions Unless otherwise noted in the text, this guide uses the following symbolic conventions. user-supplied values Italic words or characters in for- mats and command descriptions represent values that you must supply . sample user input In examples, information that the user enters appears in color . output Information that the system dis- plays appears in this type- face . literal values Bold words or characters in for- mats and command descriptions represent commands or keywords that you must use literally . Path- names are also in bold. KEY T ext with a line above and a line below denotes a key on your key- board, or a key or button which is drawn on your workstationâ s graphic display . (In this manual we refer to the Enter key . On your keyboard the key may be labeled either Enter or Return.)
xvii Pr oblems, Questions, and Suggestions If you have any problems, questions, or suggestions with our hardware, soft- ware, or documentation, please call 1-800-633-3600 (US & Canada) or con- tact the HP Response Center for your country .
xviii
1 1 Product Information
2 Product Information This chapter introduces the HP 9000 Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations, including their controls and indicators. This chapter discusses the following topics: ⢠Product description ⢠System unit front panel controls ⢠System unit rear panel connectors ⢠Monitors ⢠Keyboards ⢠Operating system overview
3 Product Information Product Description Product Description The Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations contain the follow- ing key features: ⢠Processor Performance 160 MHz (Model C160) 180 MHz (Model C180) 200 MHz (Model C200) 236 MHz (Model C240) 367 MHz (Model C360) ⢠Operating System: Native HP-UX HP-UX 10.20 (Model C160) HP-UX 10.20 (Model C180) HP-UX 10.20 with Additional Core Enhancements (ACE 9707) (Models C200 /C240 ) HP-UX 10.20 with ACE 9806 and IPR 9812 (Model C360) ⢠User Interface HP VUE version 3.0 graphical user interface HP CDE graphical user interface ⢠Compatibility Source and binary code compatible with the Series 700 product family ⢠Optional Graphics Fast 2D color graphics; choice of 1 to 4 displays HP VISUALIZE-8/24 - Accelerated 8-plane or 24-plane 3D graphics HP VISUALIZE-48 - 24/24 image planes, 8 overlay planes, 24-bit Z buffer 3D graphics HP VISUALIZE-48XP - Advanced, 24/24 image planes, 8 overlay planes, 24-bit Z buffer 3D graphics HP VISUALIZE-EG, FX2, FX4, FX6 - Advanced graphics ⢠Memory 32 MB to 1.5 GB main memory in pairs of 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB or 128 MB modules Six pairs maximum
4 Product Information Product Description ⢠Internal Storage Devices Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Hard Disk Drives (C160/C180) or Ultra, Wide Single-Ended (C200 /C240/C360) 1-inch Low Profile Drive (up to two) 1.6-inch Full Height Drive (one) Single-Ended SCSI Removable Media CD-ROM Drive or 2.0/4.0 GB, 4-mm DDS Tape Drive 4/8 GB, DDS2 DAT Drive (C200 /C240/C360) 12/24 GB, DDS3 DAT Drive (C200 /C240/C360) 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (not a SCSI Device) ⢠Standard Network Ethernet IEEE 802.3 AUI RJ45, UTP Twisted Pair 10Base-T, 100Base-T (C200 /C240/C360 only) ⢠Standard I/O One Single-Ended, 8-bit , 5 MB/sec synchronous, 1.5 MB/sec asynchronous ALT-1, 50-pin, high density SCSI connector One Fast, Wide (for hard disk drives) 20 MB/sec synchronous 68-pin, high- density SCSI connector (C160/C180) One Ultra, Wide, Single-Ended SCSI connector (C200 /C240/C360) Two Serial Interfaces RS232C, 9-pin male One Parallel Interface, Centronics, BUSY handshake, 25-pin female 16 Bit Audio Line-in and Line-out connectors Two PS/2 ports (keyboard and mouse) One HP-HIL connector (C160/C180 only) ⢠EISA/GSC 4 slots total: 1 GSC/PCI, 1 GSC/EISA/PCI and 2 GSC/EISA (C160/180) 4 slots total: 3 GSC/PCI, 1 GSC/EISA/PCI (C200 /C240/C360) ⢠Keyboards PS/2 Keyboard (mouse) or ITF Keyboard (also known as HP HIL) (HP HIL mouse)(C160/C180 only)
5 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls System Unit Front Panel Controls Figure 1 shows the location of the system unit front panel controls. Figure 1 System Unit Front Panel Controls System Power Switch Use the power switch to power the system unit on and off. NOTICE: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . NOTICE: The C200 /C240/C360 when turned off and plugged in will draw 30 watts of power and the cooling fan may turn on. Storage Devices Power Switch Power LED System LEDs Removable Volume Mute Headset Mic
6 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Power LED The power LED is located on the left side of the front panel on the disk tray . It lights when the system unit power is on and ï¬ashes until the OS is booted. Once the OS is booted, the LED remains on without ï¬ashing, indicating that a soft shutdown is enabled. System LEDs The Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations have four diagnostic LEDs located next to the system power LED. For more information on the error codes displayed by the diagnostic LEDs, see âLED Error Codesâ in the chapter , âSolving Problemsâ. LED 4 - System Heartbeat LED 3 - SCSI Bus Activity LED 2 - Network T ransmit LED 1 - Network Receive
7 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Audio Controls Next to the system LEDs are the following audio controls: The volume control, headset jack, and microphone jack features of the CD- ROM are supported through applications only . For more information on the features and electrical speciï¬cations, see the section titled âSecurity Loop,â later in this chapter . Headset Jack Accommodates mini-head- phones with a 3.5 mm diameter miniature stereo plug. V olume Control Adjusts the audio output volume to the headset or lineout. Mic Jack Accommodates microphones with a 3.5 mm diameter minia- ture stereo plug. Mute Button T urns off the audio output to line out and speaker only .
8 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Storage Device Controls and Features The Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations allow up to two of the following internal storage devices: CD-ROM drive, DDS tape drive, or ï¬oppy drive. The following sections describe the controls and features of these devices. NOTICES: Y ou may not have two of the same type of device. For example, you can have a CD-ROM device and a ï¬oppy device, but not two CD-ROMs. Due to space limitations, a DDS-format tape drive and a CD-ROM drive cannot both be mounted in the system at the same time. CD-ROM Drive Figure 2 shows the operating controls and features of the CD-ROM drive, and T able 1 describes them. Figure 2 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features Headphone Jack V olume Control Busy Eject Button Indicator Emergency Eject Disk T ray
9 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls T able 1 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Featur es Control/Featur e Purpose Busy Indicator Lights during a data access oper- ation and blinks during a data transfer . The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit when there is one of the following: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) ⢠No disc present Eject Button Press to open the disc tray and insert or remove a disc. When the drive is in use, press the eject button for more than one second to open the disc tray . Emergency Eject Remove the Phillips-type screw and insert the end of a paper clip to open the disc tray when the workstation does not have power . Disc T ray Holds the CD-ROM disc. This type of CD-ROM drive does not use a disc caddy . The disc tray does not open if the workstation power is off. Headphone Jack Used to connect headphones with a 1/8-inch connector . V olume Control V olume control for the head- phone jack.
10 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls DDS T ape Drive Y our DDS tape drive is either a DDS-DC (early or later model) or a DDS-2 tape drive with a 3.5-inch form factor , data compression, and a single-ended SCSI interface. Both drives incorporate data compression capability and are high-capacity , high transfer-rate devices for data storage on tape. W ith com- pression, the DDS-DC drives can store up to 4 GB of data on a 90 meter tape and the DDS-2 drive can store up to 8 GB of data on a 120 meter tape. Figure 3, Figure 4, and Figure 5 show the LEDs, and eject button of the DDS-format tape drives. Figure 3 DDS-DC (Early Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 4 DDS-DC (Later Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Cassette LED Drive LED Eject Button T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean DCLZ
11 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Figure 5 DDS-2 Drive Controls and Indicators T able 2 DDS T ape Drive Contr ols and Features Control/Featur e Purpose Eject Button Push the eject button to remove tape cassettes from the drive. Drive LEDs The DDS drive LEDs light and ï¬ash to indicate drive status and error con- ditions. T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean
12 Product Information System Unit Front Panel Controls Floppy Disk Drive Figure 6 shows the operating controls and features of the ï¬oppy drive, and T able 3 describes them. Figure 6 Floppy Drive Controls and Features T able 3 Floppy Drive Controls and Featur es Control/Featur e Purpose Eject Button Push the eject button to remove ï¬oppy diskettes from the drive. Drive LED The ï¬oppy drive LED ï¬ashes to indicate the drive is in use. Eject Button Drive LED
13 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors System Unit Rear Panel Connectors This section describes the following connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel: ⢠Security loop ⢠Audio connectors ⢠Keyboard and mouse connectors ⢠HP parallel (Centronics) I/O connector ⢠802.3 network connectors ⢠Serial I/O connectors ⢠SCSI connectors (including Ultra or Fast, Wide SCSI and single-ended SCSI) ⢠TOC (Transfer of Control) button ⢠Power cord connector NOTICE: T o maintain emissions compliance, verify that all cables are fully seated and properly fastened. Figure 7 shows the locations of the connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel.
14 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Figure 7 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Pullout Card The pullout card contains serial and model number information along with regulatory agency information. Security Loop The security loop provides a means of locking the storage tray with a pad- lock or other locking device, to prevent unauthorized removal from the sys- tem. Audio Line In PS/2 Mouse PS/2 Keyboard HP Parallel LAN-AUI LAN-TP Serial 1 Serial 2 Single-Ended SCSI Fast, Wide SCSI Audio Line Out Power Security Loop TOC Monitor (C160/C180) Pullout Card Monitor (C180, C200) (Ultra Wide Single-Ended C200/C240/C360)
15 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Audio Connectors The Model C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations have audio input and output capability through external input and output connectors on the rear panel and through an internal speaker . The rear panel contains the Line IN (Stereo line-in) and Line OUT (Stereo line-out) connectors. NOTICE: T o maintain compliance with FCC/CISPR B you must use fully shielded, unbalanced audio cables and plugs. The audio connectors are standard stereo audio mini-jacks. Hewlett-Packard recommends using gold-plated plugs available through audio retailers. The following summarizes the capabilities of the Model C160/C180/C200/C240/ C360 workstations: ⢠Audio Features Programmable sample rates: 8kHz, 16kHz, 32kHz, 48kHz, 1 1.025kHz, 22.05kHz, and 44.1kHz. Programmable output attenuation: 0 to -96dB in -1.5dB steps Programmable input gain: 0 to 22.5dB in 1.5dB steps. Input monitoring: 16-bit linear , 8-bit u-law , or A-law coding ⢠Audio Inputs Line-in Mono microphone compatible with 1.5V phantom supply (bias voltage sup- plied by the system) CD-ROM audio (if internal CD-ROM is installed) ⢠Audio Outputs Line-out Headset
16 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Built-in mono speaker ⢠Audio CODEC Crystal CS4215 T able 4 summarizes the audio electrical speciï¬cations for the Model C160/ C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations. T able 4 Audio Electrical Speciï¬cations Frequency Response 25-20,000Hz Input Sensitivity/Impedance Line Out 2.0Vpk/47k ohm Microphone 22mVpk/1k ohm Max Output Level/Impedance Line Out 2.8Vpp/47k ohm Headphone 2.75Vpp/50 ohm Speaker 5.88Vpp/48 ohm Output Impedance Line Out 619 ohm Headphone 1 18 ohm Signal to Noise Line Out 65 dB Headphone 61 dB Speaker 63 dB Line In 61 dB Microphone 57 dB THD (w nominal load) Line Out -73 dB Headphone -70 dB Speaker -68 dB Line In -75 dB Microphone -73 dB T o convert from dB to number of signiï¬cant bits, use the formula: n= dB/20 log10 = dB/6. For example, for 61dB S/N then n=61/6 10 signiï¬cant bits, or in other words, about 6 bits of noise.
17 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Connectors The PS/2 connectors provide an interface to the system for the keyboard, mouse, and a variety of other pointing devices, such as trackballs. Consult the documentation that accompanies each input device for speciï¬c informa- tion concerning its use. HP Parallel I/O Connector The 25-pin HP Parallel I/O interface uses Centronics interface protocols to support peripheral devices such as printers and plotters. Consult the docu- mentation that accompanies each peripheral device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. 802.3 Network Connectors The Model C160 and C180 workstations have built-in ThickNet LAN-AUI and LAN-TP (T wisted Pair) connectors for the 802.3 (ETHERNET) net- work. Connections to ThinLAN networks require an external transceiver . The workstation automatically selects the correct network setting. The Model C200 /C240/C360 workstations have built-in ThickNet LAN-AUI and 100Base-T and 10Base-T connectors for the 802.3 (ETHERNET) network. Connec- tions to ThinLAN networks require an external transceiver . The workstation auto- matically selects the correct network setting.
18 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Serial Input/Output Connectors There are a variety of pointing devices (mouse or trackball) or peripheral devices that can attach to the Serial Input/Output (SIO) ports on the worksta- tion. Peripheral devices include printers, plotters, modems, and scanners. Consult the documentation that accompanies each peripheral device for spe- ciï¬c information concerning its use. The SIO ports are programmable, allowing functions such as bit rate, char- acter length, parity , and stop bits to be set. The SIO Ports are used as inter- faces for serial asynchronous devices to the CPU. The ports operate at up to a 460.8 K baud rate. T able 5 shows the SIO connector pin listings. The serial connectors are 9-pin D-sub connectors. Signal names are those speciï¬ed in the EIA RS-232 stan- dard. T able 5 Serial I/O Pins Pin No. Signal Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 2 RXD Receive Data 3 TXD T ransmit Data 4 DTR Data T erminal Ready 5 GND Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 R TS Request T o Send 8 CTS Clear T o Send 9 RI Ring Indicator
19 Product Information System Unit Rear Panel Connectors SCSI Connectors Use the SCSI connectors to connect external SCSI devices such as DDS-for- mat tape drives and CD-ROM drives. Consult the documentation that accompanies each SCSI device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. Refer to Appendix C of this manual for information about connecting SCSI devices to your workstation. NOTICE: There must AL W A YS be a terminator at both ends of a SCSI bus. This means one internal terminator and one external terminator . The Fast-Wide Differential SCSI, Ultra-wide, Single-Ended SCSI and Narrow Single- Ended SCSI connectors must have a terminator connected when no external device is connected. Note that the fast, wide differential terminators, ultra-wide, single-ended terminators and the narrow single- ended terminators are different and not interchangeable. W ARNING: The C200/C240/C360 workstations have an Ultra Wide-SE SCSI interface in place of the Fast-Wide SCSI interface. These interfaces are not compatible. Connecting a Fast-Wide device to an Ultra Wide-SE interface will not work and may damage the device. Be sure to connect only Fast-Wide devices to a Fast- Wide interface and Ultra Wide-SE devices to an Ultra Wide-SE interface. TOC Button The TOC button resets the system and transfers control from the default device to an auxiliary device. Power Cord Connector Plug the workstationâ s power cord into the power cord connector to provide ac power to the system.
20 Product Information Monitors Monitors The Model C160/C180 workstations have a graphics controller built-in on the I/O board. The Model C180/C200/C240/C360 workstations have a high- performance graphics card installed in an option slot. The following HP monitors are supported: ⢠17-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4330) ⢠20-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4331) Before using your monitor you should become familiar with its controls, connectors, and indicators. For this information, consult the documentation that was packaged with your monitor . The built-in monitor connector is a new Enhanced V ideo connector . An EVC to DB adapter (HP Part No. 8120-6861), included with your system, is required to use monitors that have DB-15 type connectors.
21 Product Information Keyboard Keyboard The C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 systems use a PS/2 keyboard which con- nects to the PS/2 interface connector on the rear of your workstation. Pointing Devices The PS/2 connector , the HIL port, or the Serial ports support using an HP three-button mouse, a trackball, or other options as pointing devices. For instructions on using a particular device, see the manual that accompanies the device. For general information on using three-button mice and on the various cur- sor shapes associated with different areas of HP VUE while using a mouse, see Using Y our HP W orkstation .
22 Product Information Operating System Overview Operating System Overview The Model C160/C180 workstations use version 10.20 or later of the HP-UX operating system. The Model C200/C240 workstations require the W orkstation Additional Core Enhancements (ACE 9707) for HP-UX 10.20. The Model C360 workstations require the W orkstation Additional Core Enhancements (ACE 9806) for HP-UX 10.20 and the IPR 9812 software. Instant Ignition systems (systems with preloaded software) have X-windows and the Hewlett-Packard HP VUE 3.0 graphical user interface installed and conï¬gured. Refer to Using Y our HP W orkstation for more information on Instant Igni- tion.
23 2 Using Your CD-ROM Drive
24 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive This chapter describes how to use your CD-ROM drive. It is divided into the following sections: ⢠CD-ROM drive and CD-ROM media descriptions ⢠Operating the CD-ROM Drive ⢠Mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc ⢠Troubleshooting NOTICE Be sure you read and understand the information on mounting and unmounting CD-ROM discs before you begin using your CD-ROM disc drive. This chapter provides an overview of the optional CD-ROM drive and media, and describes how to use the CD-ROM drive. W e assume the CD- ROM drive is set to the factory default address of SCSI ID 2. NOTICE Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot. If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator .
25 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions This section describes basic information needed for using the CD-ROM drive and CD-ROM discs. CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive is a random access read-only mass storage device that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive supports the ISO 9660 and High Sierra format standards. Y ou can access information from the drive like any other disk drive, except that you cannot write to the drive. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for reading data optically , and includes an embedded controller with a SCSI interface.
26 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions Controls and Features Figure 8 shows and T able 6 describes the operating controls and features of the CD-ROM drives. Figure 8 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features Jack Headset V olume Control Thumbwheel Busy Indicator Eject Button Emergency Eject Hole
27 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions NOTICE The V olume Control, Headset Jack, and Audio Jack features of the CD- ROM drive are supported through applications only . T able 6 CD-ROM Drive Operating Controls and Featur es Control/Featur e Purpose Headset Jack Y ou can plug mini-headphones with a 3.5-mm diameter miniature stereo plug into this jack. V olume Control Use the volume control to adjust the audio output volume to the headset jack. Busy Indicator The Busy Indicator lights during a data access operation and blinks during a data transfer . The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit when there is one of the following: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) ⢠No disc present Eject Button Press the Eject Button to open the Disc T ray and insert or remove a disc. When the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to open the Disc T ray . Emergency Eject By inserting the end of a paper clip, you can open the Disc T ray when the workstation does not have power .
28 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions CD-ROM Media CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 in.) in diameter , and use one data surface with a capacity of approximately 600 megabytes. The data surface contains pits and ï¬at spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. Y ou may access ï¬les and data stored on a CD-ROM disc, but you may not write ï¬les or data to a CD-ROM disc. CD-ROM data discs are identical to audio compact discs (CDs) except that they store computer data and information. CAUTION: Handle CD-ROM discs by the edges only . Always be sure a CD-ROM disc is either in the CD-ROM drive or its protective case when not in use. This will lessen the chance of exposing the disc surface to dust. Over time, dust reduces the reliability of the read head in the CD-ROM drive. Caring for CD-ROM Discs Observe the following guidelines to help prevent data loss and prolong the life of your CD-ROM discs and drive: ⢠Use CD-ROM discs in a clean environment to prevent dust particles from scratching disc surfaces. ⢠Store CD-ROM discs in a cool, dry place to prevent moisture and heat damage. ⢠Donât try to clean the surface of a CD-ROM disc with cleaning solvents, as some cleaning solvents may damage the disc. NOTICE: Y ou must mount the disc after loading it into the drive. Refer to the section âMounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc,â later in this chapter , for instructions about mounting a disc.
29 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your CD-ROM drive. Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM in the Disc Tray This subsection describes how to load or unload a CD-ROM disc in the CD- ROM drive. Disc Tray Description This CD-ROM is designed to be used in either the horizontal or vertical position, depending on whether your system unit is horizontal or vertical (in the ï¬oor stand). The disc tray has four spring-loaded disc holders that hold the disc in place when the CD-ROM drive is in the vertical position. When the drive is in the horizontal position, the disc holders are not used and are held out of the way by four disc holder retainers. Figure 9 shows the CD- ROM disc tray , and disc holders. Figure 9 CD-ROM Disc Tray Disc Holder Disc Holder Disc Holder
30 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive This CD-ROM drive has an automatic loading/ejecting feature. T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: Figure 10 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 1 Check that the workstation is powered on. 2 To open the disc tray, press and release the load/eject button on the CD-ROM drive. 3 Be sure the disc holders are held away from the disc by the disc holder retainers. 4 Hold the disc by the edges with the label side up and place it in the disc tray as shown in Figure 10. 5 To close the disc tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
31 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive Perform the following steps to unload a disc from the CD-ROM drive: Figure 11 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Horizontally Mounted Drive 1 Press the eject button to eject the disc tray from the drive. If the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to eject the disc tray. NOTICE: Y ou must unmount the disc before you eject it from the drive. Refer to the subsection, âUnmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM,â for instructions on unmounting a disc. 2 Wait until the drive has fully ejected the disc tray. Be sure the disc holders are held away from the disc by the disc holder retainers, Then remove the disc from the tray as shown in Figure 11. Be careful to touch only the edges of the disc. 3 To close the Disc Tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
32 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: Figure 12 Releasing the Disc Holder Retainers 1 Make sure the four disc holders are disengaged from the disc holder retainers, as shown in Figure 12. Disc Holder A Disc Holder C Disc Holder B Disc Holder D
33 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive 2 Hold the disc with the label side away from the tray and place the edge of the disc onto disc holders A and B as shown in Figure 13. Figure 13 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive 3 Press down gently against the spring tension of disc holders A and B, and swing the top of the disc in until it is held by disc holders C and D. 4 To close the disc tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
34 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive Perform the following steps to unload a disc from the CD-ROM drive: Figure 14 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Vertically Mounted Drive 1 Press the eject button to eject the disc tray from the drive. If the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to eject the disc tray. NOTICE: Y ou must unmount the disc before you eject it from the drive. Refer to the subsection, âUnmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM,â for instruction on unmounting a disc. 2 Press down gently against the spring tension of disc holders A and B and swing the top of the disc away from disc holders C and D as shown in Figure 14. 3 Remove the disc from disc holders A and B. 4 To close the Disc Tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
35 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Verifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: /usr/sbin/ioscan -d sdisk RETURN After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/12 ext_bus GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/12.0 target 8/12.0.0 disk QUANTUM LPS1080WD 8/12.5 target 8/12.5.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/12.6 target 8/12.6.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.2 target 8/16/5.2.0 disk TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA 8/16/5.4 target 8/16/5.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST3600N 8/16/5.6 target 8/16/5.6.0 disk MICROP 2112 10 bc I/O Adapter 10/12 ext_bus GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 10/12.4 target 10/12.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST31200W If ioscan does not see your CD-ROM drive it returns the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 6, âSolving Problems.â
36 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc T o access information on a CD-ROM disc, you must ï¬rst mount the disc. This applies to ï¬le system information only . If you wish to load a music CD, for example, you would not need to mount the disc. Mounting a disc with ï¬le system information on it gives the disc a pathname that allows your workstation to communicate electronically with it. Y ou must unmount the CD-ROM disc before removing it from the drive. CAUTION: T o use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted ï¬le system, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc can cause a system error condition that can require rebooting the system. If your workstation is running HP VUE, follow these instructions to mount and unmount a CD-ROM disc as a ï¬le system. If youâre using something other than HP VUE, use the instructions for mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc that come with that product. For more information on conï¬g- uring your CD-ROM drive, see the System Administration T asks manual or online help. The procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as r oot , contact your system administrator . Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to mount a CD-ROM disc: 1 Log in as root. If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2 Load the CD-ROM disc into the disc tray and gently push the tray into the drive. 3 In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam RETURN
37 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 4 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices ->. 5 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems ->. 6 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. Disks that are unmounted will have the word âunusedâ in the Use column. 7 From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive 8 The Select a Disk to Add... window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the CD-ROM disc you want to mount. 9 Click on OK . 10 The Set Disk Usage and Options... window opens. Select File System and click on OK . 11 The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Mounting file system... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on OK. Now you can access the CD-ROM disc as you would any other mounted ï¬le system.
38 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to unmount a CD-ROM disc: NOTICE: Before you unmount a CD-ROM disc, make sure that your working directory (the directory in which a relative path name search begins) is set to some directory other than the one under which the disc was mounted. CAUTION: If you wish to use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted ï¬le system, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc may cause a system error condition that may require rebooting the system. 1 Log in as root. If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam RETURN 3 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices ->. 4 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems ->. 5 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks. The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. 6 Highlight the disc you want to unmount and click on Remove a Hard Disk Drive from the Actions menu.
39 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 7 A window with the following message opens: Do you want to remove the disk? Click on Y es . 8 Press the eject button on the CD-ROM drive and remove the CD-ROM disc from the disc tray . Reading the Busy Light The CD-ROM busy light shows the status of the drive during the self test and during activity with the host system. The CD-ROM drive performs the self test when one of the following hap- pens: ⢠Y ou load a disc and close the Disc T ray . ⢠Y ou turn on the workstation with a disc already loaded in the CD-ROM drive. For the self test, the busy light operates in the following sequence: 1 Light On - The busy light goes on when the disc loads into the drive. 2 Light Flashing - The light ï¬ashes six times while a read test is per- formed on the disc. 3 Light Off - The light goes of f when the self test is complete.
40 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc The busy light stays on after the self test when one of the following condi- tions exist: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) ⢠No disc present The busy light goes off when one of the following conditions exist: ⢠A CD-ROM drive power failure exists. ⢠The drive is idle on the SCSI bus. The busy light ï¬ashes during normal activity with the system.
41 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your CD-ROM drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â
42 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive T roubleshooting
43 3 Using Your Digital Data Storage (DDS) Tape Drive
44 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive This chapter describes how to use the optional Digital Data Storage (DDS) tape drive. It also describes how to maintain and care for the drive. This chapter provides information on the following: ⢠DDS tape drive and data cassette descriptions ⢠Operating the DDS tape drive ⢠Ordering information CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled DDS (Digital Data Storage). Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
45 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions DDS Tape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions This section describes basic information needed for using your DDS tape drive and data cassettes. DDS Drive Y our DDS tape drive is either a DDS-DC (early or later model) or a DDS-2 tape drive with a 3.5-inch form factor , data compression, and a narrow sin- gle-ended SCSI interface. Both drives incorporate data compression capabil- ity and are high-capacity , high transfer-rate devices for data storage on tape. W ith compression, the DDS-DC drives can store up to 4 GB of data on a 90 meter tape and the DDS-2 drive can store up to 8 GB of data on a 120 meter tape. Storage Capacities The maximum storage capacities of different DDS drives with and without data compression are shown in the following tables; T able 7 DDS T ape Drive Capacities W ithout Data Compression T ape Length Full Height 5 1/4 DDS T ape Drive DDS-DC T ape Drives DDS-2 T ape Drive 60 meter 1.3 GB 1.3 GB 1.3 GB 90 meter Not Supported 2.0 GB 2.0 GB 120 meter Not Supported Not Supported 4.0 GB T able 8 DDS T ape Drive Capacities W ith Data Compression T ape Length Full Height 5 1/4 DDS T ape Drive DDS-DC T ape Drives DDS-2 T ape Drive 60 meter 2.6 GB 2.6 GB 2.6 GB 90 meter Not Supported 4.0 GB 4.0 GB 120 meter Not Supported Not Supported 8.0 GB
46 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Controls and Indicators Figure 15, Figure 16, and Figure 17 show the LEDs, and eject button of the DDS-format tape drives. Figure 15 DDS-DC (Early Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 16 DDS-DC (Later Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 17 DDS-2 Drive Controls and Indicators Cassette LED Drive LED Eject Button T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean DCLZ T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean
47 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions LEDs This section describes the LED codes that are displayed. The two LEDs on the front panels of the DDS drives indicate different activ- ities or problems that occur . Figure 18 lists the LED codes and their meanings for the DDS-DC early model drive. Figure 19 lists the LED codes and their meanings for the DDS- DC later model and DDS-2 drives. Figure 18 DDS-DC (Early Model) Tape Drive LED Display Codes OFF Green Amber Pulsing Green Pulsing Amber Pulsing Green and Amber Key Cassette Drive Meaning Read/Write States Write-Protect States Error States Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Media wear (caution) High humidity Self-test (normal) Self-test (failure)
48 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Figure 19 DDS-DC (Later Model) and DDS-2 Tape Drive LED Display Codes LED Warning Conditions The following sections describe actions to take if the LEDs indicate a warn- ing condition. High Humidity If the LEDs display the high humidity signal, the humidity is too high. The drive does not perform any operations until the humidity drops. Self-Test (Failure) If the LEDs display the self-test (failure) signal, a fault was diagnosed during the self tests. Note the pattern of the pulses and con- tact your local service representative. Media Wear (Caution) Hewlett-Packard DDS drives continually monitor the number of errors they have to correct when reading and writing to a tape to determine tape wear and tape head cleanliness. If excessive tape wear or dirty tape heads are suspected, the drive warns you by displaying the Media W ear (Caution) signal on the LED indicators. OFF Steady Green Steady Amber Flashing Green Pulsing Amber Fast Flash Green 1/4 sec on 1/4 sec off Key Tape Clean/ Meaning Activity â load or unload Activity â read or write Cartridge loaded Cleaning needed Attention Fault Any Any 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off
49 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions If the LED indicators on your DDS-format drive display the Media W ear (Caution) condition, follow this procedure: 1 Check the system console for any tape error messages. A hard error during a read or write operation may have occurred. 2 Clean the heads with a cleaning cassette (HP92283K) as described in âCleaning the T ape Heads,â later in this chapter . 3 Repeat the operation you performed when the Media W ear (Caution) signal dis- played. If the Media W ear (Caution) signal still displays, then the data cassette should be replaced. 4 If you are performing a backup from disk to tape, discard the data cassette and back up your ï¬les using a new data cassette. 5 If you are performing a restore from tape to disk, complete the restore, back up the ï¬les to a new data cassette, then discard the data cassette. Data Cassettes Media Life HP DDS data cassettes are currently speciï¬ed to 2000 passes over any part of the tape under optimal environmental conditions (50% relative humidity , 22 degrees C). During a tape operation, any one area of the tape may have multiple passes over the heads. This translates into approximately 200 to 300 backups or restores. Under certain conditions, the life of your data cassette is less. Replace your data cassettes after 100 backups or restores if your operating conditions meet any of the following criteria: ⢠The relative humidity in your operating environment is consistently less than 50%. ⢠Y ou know that the backup software you are using makes multiple passes over sec- tions of the tape during backups or restores. ⢠Y ou notice that when you do backups and restores the tape stops and starts fre- quently .
50 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Cleaning the Tape Heads Clean the heads of your tape drive after every 25 hours of tape drive use or if the Media W ear (Caution) signal is displayed on the LED. NOTICE: Only use HP Cleaning Cassettes (HP92283K) to clean the tape heads. Do not use swabs or other means of cleaning the tape heads. Follow this procedure to clean the tape heads: 1 Insert the cleaning cassette into the drive. The tape automatically loads the cas- sette and cleans the heads. At the end of the cleaning cycle, the drive ejects the cassette. 2 W rite the current date on the label on the cleaning cassette so that you know how many times you have used it. Discard the cleaning cassette after you have used it 25 times. Media Restrictions If you interchange media between other DDS-format tape drives, note that data cassettes with compressed data can only be read by tape drives that have data compression capabilities. This includes data cassettes that contain both compressed and noncompressed data.
51 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Data Cassette Y ou can only store or change information on a data cassette when the write- protect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the data cas- sette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Figure 20. Figure 20 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a DDS Tape T o protect information on a data cassette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 20. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for transferring data to a cassette. Push tab right for write. Push tab left for write-pr otect .
52 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Operating the DDS Tape Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your DDS tape drive. Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette Follow these steps to load and unload a data cassette from the DDS tape drive: 1 Insert the data cassette into the drive, as shown in Figure 21. Figure 21 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 2 Push the data cassette about three quarters of the way into the drive. The drive automatically pulls the data cassette the rest of the way in. When the LEDs on the front of the drive stop ï¬ashing, the drive has loaded the data cassette. 3 T o remove the data cassette, press and release the eject button on the front of the drive, as shown in Figure 21. The LEDs on the drive ï¬ash on and off. T en to twen- ty seconds later , the data cassette slides partway out of the drive. Remove the cas- sette from the drive. Eject Button
53 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Verifying the DDS Tape Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the DDS-format tape drive, enter the following: /usr/sbin/ioscan -d stape After a few moments the ioscan utility returns a message similar to the fol- lowing: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.3 target 8/16/5.3.0 tape HP HP35480A If ioscan does not see your tape drive, it will return the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 5, âSolving Problems.â
54 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Using Device Files Device ï¬les are special ï¬les that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a speciï¬c device, and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device ï¬les are available for use with your tape drive, use the following procedure: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Periph- eral Devices -> . 3 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Tape Drives -> . 4 The Tape Drives window opens. 5 In the list of tape drives, click on the desired tape drive to select it. 6 From the Actions menu, click on Show Device Files . A window opens with a list of the device ï¬les for the selected tape drive with an explanation of each one.
55 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Archiving Data This section describes how to transfer data to and from a DDS-format data cassette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command and your tape driveâ s device ï¬le. The tar command allows you to save ï¬les to a data cassette, restore ï¬les from a data cassette to your system, or list the ï¬les on your data cassette. Writing to a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to save ï¬les to a data cassette: 1 Check that the write-protect tab on the data cassette is in the write position. 2 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 3 In a terminal window , enter the following command line to write to the tape: tar -cvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to write to the tape. T o use the data compression mode, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as supporting compression.
56 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Your System Use the following instructions to restore ï¬les from a data cassette to your system: 1 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2 In a terminal window , use cd to change to the directory you want the ï¬les to reside in. 3 Enter the following command line to restore data: tar -xvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to restore from the tape. If pathname is not speciï¬ed, everything on the data cassette is restored. If the tape was made using data compression, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as supporting compression. Listing the Files on a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to list the ï¬les on a data cassette: 1 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command line to receive a ï¬le listing of the data cassette: tar -tvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam. If the tape was made with data compression, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as sup- porting compression.
57 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Further Command Information For additional information on using tar and a complete list of the command arguments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following: man tar The man utility looks up man pages on the system. Y ou may also communicate with the tape drive with the cpio, ftio, mt, and fbackup commands. For more information on these commands, enter the following in a terminal window: man command
58 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your DDS tape drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard data cassettes and cleaning cassettes for use in your DDS tape drive, use the following order numbers: ⢠HP92283A - Box of ï¬ve 60-meter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92283B - Box of ï¬ve 90-meter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92300A - Box of ï¬ve 120-meter DDS data cassettes (not supported on the DDS-DC drives) ⢠HP92283K - Package of two head-cleaning cassettes ⢠HP92283L - Lockable storage box for 12 cassettes CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled as DDS (Digital Data Storage) cassettes. Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
59 4 Using Your 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive
60 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive This chapter describes how to perform tasks that allow you to archive to or transfer data from the optional 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive. The information is organized into the following sections: ⢠Using the floppy diskette ⢠Operating the floppy drive ⢠Ordering information NOTICE: Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator .
61 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette Using the Floppy Diskette This section describes basic information needed for using your ï¬oppy dis- kettes. Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Diskette Y ou can only store or change information on a diskette when the write-pro- tect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the diskette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Fig- ure 22. Figure 22 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Floppy Diskette T o protect ï¬les on a diskette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 22. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for formatting a new diskette and transferring data to a diskette. Push tab up for write. Push tab down for write-pr otect.
62 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette Inserting and Removing a Diskette Follow these steps to insert and remove a diskette from the ï¬oppy disk drive: 1 Insert the diskette into the drive, as shown in Figure 23. Figure 23 Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 2 Push the diskette into the ï¬oppy drive until it clicks into place. 3 T o remove the diskette, push the eject button, as shown in Figure 23. Then re- move the diskette. Eject Button
63 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Operating the Floppy Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive. Verifying the Floppy Drive Configuration T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the ï¬oppy drive, use the ioscan command to see which devices are currently in use on your sys- tem. 1 In a terminal window , enter the following at the prompt: ioscan After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the I/O devices it could find. If there is a floppy drive in the list, that listing appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/0 graphics Graphics 8/16/10 pc Built-in Floppy Drive
64 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Using Device Files Device ï¬les are special ï¬les that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a speciï¬c device and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device ï¬les are available for use with your ï¬oppy drive, use the following procedure: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems-> . 3 The Disks and File Systems window opens. 4 In the list of drives, click on the floppy drive listing to select it. 5 From the Actions menu, click on View More Information . A window opens with a list of information for the ï¬oppy drive, including the device ï¬les. Identify your ï¬oppy device ï¬le number and use it in the following steps.
65 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Formatting a New Diskette Y ou must always format a new ï¬oppy diskette with the mediainit utility before using it. T o format a new ï¬oppy diskette follow these steps: 1 Log in as root . 2 Make sure that the write-protect tab on the ï¬oppy diskette is in the write position, as shown in Figure 22. 3 Insert the diskette into the ï¬oppy disk drive. 4 In a terminal window , execute mediainit with an interleave of 2 by entering the following: mediainit -i 2 devicefile where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam .
66 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Transferring Data To and From a Floppy Diskette This section describes how to transfer data to and from your ï¬oppy diskette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command with your ï¬oppy driveâ s device ï¬le. The tar command saves ï¬les to a ï¬oppy diskette, restores ï¬les from a ï¬oppy diskette, or lists ï¬les on a ï¬oppy diskette. Y ou need to set the write protect tab to the write position to transfer data to the diskette. The write-protect tab can be in either position when restoring data from a diskette or listing the ï¬les on a diskette. Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to save ï¬les to a ï¬oppy diskette: 1 Check that the write-protect tab on the ï¬oppy diskette is in the write position. 2 Load the formatted ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 3 In a terminal window, enter the following command line to write to the diskette: tar -cvf devicefile pathname where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam and pathname is the path- name of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to write to the dis- kette. Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Your System Use the following instructions to restore ï¬les from a ï¬oppy diskette to your system: 1 Load the ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 2 In a terminal window, use the cd command to change to the directory you want the files to reside in: cd directory_path where dir ectory_path is the pathname of the directory .
67 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive 3 Enter the following command line: tar -xvf devicefile pathname where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam and pathname is the path- name of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to restore from the diskette. If you donât specify pathname, everything on the ï¬oppy diskette is restored. Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to list the ï¬les on a ï¬oppy diskette: 1 Load the ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command line: tar -tvf deviceï¬le where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam. All ï¬les on the ï¬oppy diskette are listed.
68 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive For More Information For more information on using tar and a complete list of the command argu- ments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following in a terminal win- dow: man tar The man utility looks up man pages on the system. Y ou can mount the ï¬oppy drive as a ï¬le system using the SAM utility . Be sure to unmount the drive before removing it as a ï¬le system. For more information about how to mount and unmount the ï¬oppy drive, see the man- ual Using HP-UX (B2910-90001). For more information on copying data to or from your system to other media, including your ï¬oppy diskette, refer to the cpio man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man cpio For more information on copying to or from DOS ï¬les, refer to the doscp man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man doscp For more information on listing the contents of DOS directories, refer to the dosls man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man dosls For more information on using your ï¬oppy disk drive and ï¬oppy diskettes, refer to the ï¬oppy man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man floppy For more information on using the mediainit command, refer to the medi- ainit man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man mediainit
69 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Configuring the Floppy Driver If you reload software or rebuild the Instant Ignition system on your work- station, you need to reconï¬gure the HP-UX Kernel to add the ï¬oppy driver . Use the SAM utility to add the ï¬exible disk driver and build a new HP-UX kernel. For more information about how to reconï¬gure the kernel using SAM, see the following manuals: ⢠System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers (B2355-90040) ⢠Using HP-UX (B2910-90001)
70 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your ï¬oppy disk drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard micro ï¬exible diskettes for use in your 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive, use the following order number: HP-92192X High-Density Micro Flexible Disks (1.44MB Formatted Capacity) - box of ten diskettes
71 5 Solving Problems
72 Solving Problems This chapter contains information to help you determine whatâ s wrong with your system when you have problems. If you have a problem that isnât listed in this chapter , or if your problem persists, contact your designated service representative. When calling for service, always have your systemâ s model number and serial number ready . This chapter is divided into the following sections ⢠Common problems and solutions ⢠Interpreting LED error codes ⢠Dealing with a boot failure ⢠Running system veriï¬cation tests
73 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Common Problems and Solutions The tables in this section list common problems you may encounter with your workstation. The tables also tell you what to do to help solve the prob- lems. Problems with Powering Up the System T able 9 describes possible problems you may encounter when powering up the system and offers solutions. T able 9 Power -up Problems Problem Solution The power LED does not light. Make sure all AC power cables are connected securely to the system. Make sure the power cord is plugged into a working ac out- let. Make sure the power switch is set to the ON position. The power LED lights, but the screen is blank or ï¬ickers. Press the brightness control on the monitor to adjust it. If the screen is still blank, turn off the system and monitor power switches. When the system is completely powered off, check the video cable connections. Go to the section âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appen- dix B for information about displaying and setting your workstationâ s monitor conï¬guration. If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
74 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System T able 10 describes possible problems you may encounter when loading and booting the operating system and offers solutions. T able 10 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System Problem Solution The power LED is lit, and text appears on the screen, but more than two minutes have passed with no sign of system activ- ity . Make sure that all SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are correctly cabled. Check that both SCSI buses are correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) The system stops or hangs while booting. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failureâ in this chapter . If problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
75 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems with the 802.3 Network T able 1 1 describes possible problems you may encounter with the 802.3 net- work and offers solutions. T able 1 1 Problems with the 802.3 Network Problem Solution Cannot reach other sys- tems on the network. Applications that rely on the network will not run. Check the network connector on the back of the system unit. Make sure that the network cable or transceiver is fastened securely to the connector . Network Auto-Negotia- tion fails. Systems can- not connect or establish link. The following can cause Auto-Negotiation failure: ⢠Non-Category 5 cabling. Cabling must be installed by certified installers. ⢠Improper cable termination. ⢠Maximum cable lengths exceeded. ⢠Incompatibility/Interoperability problems between LAN devices. Check the cabling and interfaces for proper installation and operation. If you know the speed/duplex settings for the connection device, you can also manually set the worksta- tion LAN interface setting using the Boot Console Iterface, see âConï¬gure and Display LAN Settingsâ on page 204. When the workstation fails to establish a link using the LAN-TP(RJ45) connector , the workstation automatically switches from the LAN-TP(RJ45) connector to the AUI connector . Y ou can manually set the LAN interface to the AUI connector using the Boot Console Interface, see âCon- ï¬gure and Display LAN Settingsâ on page 204. If problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
76 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive T able 12 describes possible problems you may encounter using the hard disk drive and offers solutions. T able 12 Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive Problem Solution The disk drive is not accessible or does not respond. Make sure that all the SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are correctly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated (terminators con- nected). (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failureâ in this chapter . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
77 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive T able 13 describes a possible problem you may encounter when you use the CD-ROM drive and offers a solution. T able 13 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive Problem Solution The CD-ROM drive does not respond to com- mands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section âRunning System V er- iï¬cation T estsâ in this chapter to verify that the CD-ROM drive is functioning properly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative
78 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the DDS Tape Drive T able 14 describes a possible problem you may encounter using the DDS tape drive and offers solutions. T able 14 Problems Using the DDS T ape Drive Problem Solution The DDS tape drive does not respond to com- mands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you speciï¬ed the correct device ï¬le name for commands that require a device ï¬le name. Make sure the write-protect tab is set to write if you are try- ing to copy data to a data cassette. Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section "Running System V er- iï¬cation T ests" in this chapter to verify that the tape drive is functioning properly . If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
79 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive T able 15 describes a possible problem you may encounter using the ï¬oppy disk drive and offers a solution. T able 15 Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive Problem Solution The ï¬oppy drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you speciï¬ed the correct device ï¬le for com- mands that require a device ï¬le name. Make sure that the write-protect tab is set to write if you are trying to copy data to a ï¬oppy diskette. Follow the instructions in the section "Running System V er- iï¬cation T ests" in this chapter to verify that the ï¬oppy drive is functioning properly . If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
80 Solving Problems LED Error Codes LED Error Codes This section contains information about the error codes displayed by the LEDs on the systemâ s front panel. If an error occurs during the power-up diagnostics tests, the diagnostics use the front panel LEDs to display a code for the failing component. Figure 24 shows the location of the system unitâ s front panel LEDs. The four amber LEDs indicate system status and error codes. T able 16 shows the LED error codes as they appear on the front panel LEDs. Use these LED codes to determine the failing component. Figure 24 System Unit Front Panel LEDs
81 Solving Problems LED Error Codes T able 16 LED Error Codes LED V alue RS-232 Chassis Code Range Description N/A Reserved 7500 No memory found F AUL T Likely cause: SIMMs or pr ocessor boar d N/A Reserved FL T 7000-7FFF Memory Error Fault Likely Cause: Memory SIMMs System console will indicate which SIMM pair fault occurr ed on FL T 1020-4099 Processor board F AUL T (includes PDH which could be on I/O board.) FL T 5000 - 500F FL T 8000 - 8FFF FL T CD00 - CDf f* I/O System F AUL T *Except backplane faults listed below FL T 8500, 8501 FL T 8C00-8CFF Backplane F AUL T PCI F AUL T Any INIT/TEST code INITIALIZA TION and TESTING Note: These two LED codes will alter- nate to indicate forwar d pr ogress: 01 1 1, 1000, 01 1 1... Any fault not in this table including FL T 1000-101C Unknown F AUL T FL T CBF0 - CBFF HPMC F AUL T
82 Solving Problems LED Error Codes FL T A088 - A0FF No console/IPL error F AUL T N/A Reserved N/A Reserved N/A Reserved N/A Power on value. Indicates processor board fault when this value remains for more than a second following power up. T able 16 LED Error Codes LED V alue RS-232 Chassis Code Range Description
83 Solving Problems Dealing with a Boot Failure Dealing with a Boot Failure If your usual boot device (typically a disk) is not responding as it should, you must try to boot from the disk (or another boot device) by selecting it manually . T o boot a device manually , follow these steps: 1 Follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interface,â in Appendix D of this book. NOTICE: Y our workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it terminates the power . 2 At the Main Menu prompt, type the following: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl This causes your workstation to search exhaustively for bootable media. The search command looks for bootable media on your workstation. 3 Boot from one of the listed devices by typing the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, speciï¬ed in mnemonic style notation, such as sescsi.6.0. 4 If your workstation still fails to boot, there is either something wrong with the ï¬le system or with the hardware. If you suspect a ï¬le system failure, see the manual Using HP-UX for help on dealing with ï¬le system failures. If you think that some- thing is wrong with the hardware, continue reading this chapter for more trouble- shooting information. 5 Verify that your SCSI devices are properly terminated, with SCSI terminators in place and properly connected.
84 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests Running System Verification Tests HP-UX uses an online diagnostics product called the Support T ools Man- ager that allows system operation verï¬cations. Three interfaces are available with the Support T ools Manager: a command line interface (accessed through the cstm command), a menu-driven inter- face (accessed through the mstm command), and the graphical user interface (accessed through the xstm command). For more information on these user interfaces, see the online man pages by entering the following at the command line prompt: man cstm man mstm man xstm
85 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests T o access the Support T ools Manager , perform the following steps: 1 At a command line prompt, enter the following: cstm The following message appears: Support Tool Manager Version A.01.00 Type âhelpâ for a list of available commands. CSTM> 2 At the CSTM> prompt, you can enter several commands. T o see what commands are available, type the help command. 3 T o verify the system operation, type the following at the CSTM> prompt: CSTM> verify all Messages similar to the following appear: Verification has started on device (CPU). Verification has started on device (FPU). CSTM>Verification of (FPU) has completed. CSTM>Verification of (CPU) has completed. 4 Press Enter to return to the CSTM> prompt after all test results are reported. 5 T o exit the Support T ools Manager , enter the following: CSTM> exit If any tests failed, further diagnosis is necessary by qualiï¬ed service personnel. Contact your designated service representative.
86 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests
87 A Safety and Regulatory Statements
88 Safety and Regulatory Statements This appendix contains safety and regulatory statements pertaining to your C Class workstation. It provides information on the following topics: ⢠Declaration of Conformity ⢠Special video configuration statements ⢠Emissions regulations ⢠Emissions regulations compliance ⢠Datacom users statement ⢠Acoustics ⢠Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions ⢠Safety statements ⢠Laser safety statements ⢠Warnings and cautions
89 Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 1 Declaration of Conformity 1
90 Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 2 Declaration of Conformity 2
91 Safety and Regulatory Statements Special Video Conï¬guration Statements Special Video Configuration Statements The following statements apply only to those applications which include a cable connected to the S-V ideo connector on the A4248A card. No modiï¬- cation to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected to other connectors on the card but not to the S- V ideo connector . For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: W ARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. For FCC Applications: NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
92 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations Emissions Regulations Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and the Cana- dian Department of Communications. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa- tion. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guaran- tee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip- ment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (determined by turning the equipment off and on), you can correct the inter- ference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Ask the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. Hewlett-Packardâ s system certiï¬cation tests were conducted with HP-sup- ported peripheral devices and HP shielded cables, such as those you receive with your computer . Changes or modiï¬cations not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard could void the user â s authority to operate the equipment. Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference. ⢠This device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ⢠Cables used with this device must be properly shielded to comply with the re- quirements of the FCC.
93 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations Compliance VCCI Class B ITE (Japan) Korea RRL (EMI Class A) Emissions Regulations Compliance Any third-party I/O device installed in HP system(s) must be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the preceding Emissions Regulations state- ments. In the event that a third-party noncompliant I/O device is installed, the customer assumes all responsibility and liability arising therefrom.
94 Safety and Regulatory Statements Acoustics Acoustics Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV Lpa <70dB Lpa<70dB operator position am Arbeitsplatz normal operation normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 T .19 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions Electrostatic charges can damage the integrated circuits on printed circuit boards. T o prevent such damage from occurring, observe the following pre- cautions during board unpacking and installation: ⢠Stand on a static-free mat. ⢠W ear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is dis- charged from your body to ground. ⢠Connect all equipment together , including the static-free mat, static strap, routing nodes, and peripheral units. ⢠Keep uninstalled printed circuit boards in their protective antistatic bags. ⢠Handle printed circuit boards by their edges, once you have removed them from their protective antistatic bags.
95 Safety and Regulatory Statements Safety Statement Safety Statement This equipment conforms to the following safety standards: ⢠UL 1950 ⢠CSA 950 ⢠IEC 950 ⢠EN 60950
96 Safety and Regulatory Statements Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) The CD ROM mass-storage system is certiï¬ed as a Class-1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radia- tion Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the mass-storage system does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Because laser light emitted inside the mass-storage system is com- pletely conï¬ned within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Visible LEDs The visible LED on this product is classiï¬ed as â Class 1 LED PRODUCTâ in accordance with EN 60825-1.
97 Safety and Regulatory Statements W arnings and Cautions Warnings and Cautions
98 Safety and Regulatory Statements W arnings and Cautions
99 B Changing Your Workstationâs Hardware Configuration
100 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration This appendix describes the procedures to change your workstationâ s hard- ware conï¬guration. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Preparing your workstation ⢠Installing storage devices ⢠Removing the main tray assembly ⢠Replacing the main tray assembly ⢠Installing additional memory ⢠Installing the EGRAM module ⢠Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC option board ⢠Changing your monitor type NOTICE: Y our workstation shipped with a package of extra disk slides. Keep the slides in a safe place, you will need them when you add new devices to the storage tray . CAUTION: Always wear a properly grounded wrist strap when reconï¬guring your workstation. Use the following tools to remove or replace hardware parts when changing your conï¬guration: ⢠Light-duty flatblade screwdriver with 150 mm (6 inch) blade ⢠Needlenose pliers Also, read the ESD Precautions in Appendix A of this guide.
101 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs Checking the SCSI IDs T o determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use on your system, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1 At a command line prompt, enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan -f After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ============================================================================================= bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS bc 1 8 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 0 8/0 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 0 8/0.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 3 8/0.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE QUANTUM LPS1080WD target 1 8/0.5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 2 8/0.5.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW target 2 8/0.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8/0.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW ba 0 8/16 bus_adapterCLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter ext_bus 2 8/16/0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface audio 0 8/16/1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Audio tty 0 8/16/4 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ext_bus 1 8/16/5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in SCSI target 3 8/16/5.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8/16/5.2.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA target 4 8/16/5.3 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE tape 0 8/16/5.3.0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A target 5 8/16/5.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 10 8/16/5.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N target 6 8/16/5.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 5 8/16/5.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE MICROP 2112 lan 0 8/16/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in LAN ps2 0 8/16/7 ps2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Keyboard/Mouse bc 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 3 10/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC Fast/WideSCSI Interface target 7 10/12.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 6 10/12.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST31200W graphics 2 10/16 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ba 1 8/20 bus_adapterCLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter hil 0 8/20/1 hil CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in HIL tty 1 8/20/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ba 2 8/20/5 eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Bus Adapter ext_bus 4 8/20/5/3 hshpib CLAIMED INTERFACE EISA card HWP0C70 target 8 8/20/5/3.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE target 9 8/20/5/3.1 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE target 10 8/20/5/3.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
102 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs 2 You can find out the SCSI IDs currently in use by looking under the H/W Path heading. The listing 8/16/5 scsi is the built-in SCSI bus controller. For devices connected to the built-in SCSI bus, such as disks, the fourth number is the SCSI ID for that device. For example, the listing 8/16/5.4.0 in the sample device list tells you that there is a SCSI device (a disk) currently using ID 4 on the SCSI bus. NOTICE: Never use SCSI address 7 for any device. Address 7 is reserved for the SCSI controller .
103 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Preparing Y our Workstation Preparing Your Workstation This section describes how to prepare your workstation for changing its con- ï¬guration. Use the following procedure to prepare your workstation: 1 Power off your workstation by pressing the power button on the front panel. When you press the power button, the workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it powers off the system. 2 When the workstation has completed shutting down and powering off, power off the monitor, and any peripheral devices connected to the workstation. 3 Unplug the power cord of the system unit, the monitor, and any peripheral devic- es from ac wall outlets. 4 Unplug the power cord from the back of the system unit. 5 Remove the floor stand from the system unit, as shown in Figure 25.
104 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Preparing Y our Workstation Figure 25 Removing the Floor Stand 6 Lay the system unit on a flat surface, such as a table top. 7 Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to bare metal on the back of the system unit.
105 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing Storage Devices This section describes how to install storage devices in your workstation. Before installing a new storage device, perform the following procedures as described earlier in this appendix: ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Preparing your workstation CAUTION: All storage devices are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the devices, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the storage device kit. Always handle the drive carefully . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for any of your storage devicesâ SCSI addresses. The host SCSI controllers use SCSI ID 7.
106 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Preparing to Install Your Storage Device This section describes information that you need to consider and procedures that you need to perform before installing any storage device. Configuring your Storage Device T able 17 lists the recommended SCSI IDs for internal storage devices. If an existing device already uses one of the suggested IDs, select an alternate ID. Set the jumpers and SCSI IDs according to the installation instructions that came with your device. Determining Your Storage Devices Position Each storage device is restricted as to where in the storage tray it may be installed. Before installing a storage device, use Figure 26 and T able 18 to determine which storage tray position is correct for your device. Figure 26 shows the storage device positions in the storage tray . T able 18 lists what devices are supported in the different storage tray positions. The numbers in the tableâ s left column refer to the position numbers in the ï¬gure. T able 17 Default SCSI IDs Ultra or Fast, Wide SCSI Devices SCSI ID 1st Hard Disk Drive 6 2nd Hard Disk Drive 5 Single-Ended SCSI Devices SCSI ID CD-ROM Drive 2 DDS-Format T ape Drive 3 NOTE: The ï¬oppy drive is not a SCSI device.
107 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Figure 26 Storage Tray Positions T able 18 Storage T ray Conï¬gurations Storage T ray Position Supported Devices Conditions 1 Floppy Drive 1-inch Low Proï¬le Disk Drive 2 CD-ROM DDS-T ape 3 1-inch Low Proï¬le Disk Drive 1.6-inch Full Height Disk Drive This is the only supported position for a 1.6-inch full height disk drive. 4 1-inch Low Proï¬le Disk Drive All hard disk drives are either fast, wide, differential SCSI devices (C160/ C180) or ultra, wide single-ended SCSI devices (C200 /C240/C360). The CD- ROM drive and the DDS tape drive are single-ended SCSI devices. The ï¬oppy drive is not a SCSI device.
108 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Storage Device Cable Routing When you install your storage device, be aware of the suggested cable rout- ing paths as indicated in the cable routing label that is afï¬xed to the top of the storage tray . Removing the Storage Tray Perform the following procedure to remove the storage tray from the system unit: NOTE: To prevent injury, remove monitor from system unit before removing storage tray. 1 Remove the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 27. 2 If installed, remove any locking device from the storage tray security loop on the rear of the system unit. 3 Place your fingertips in the groove on the bottom of the storage tray bezel. See Figure 27. Figure 27 Removing the Storage Tray 4 Slide the storage tray completely out of the system unit. Retaining Screw
109 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices CAUTION: Be sure to support the storage tray from underneath while sliding it out of the system unit. Proceed to one of the following sections in this appendix to install your stor- age device in the storage tray: ⢠Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format Tape Drive ⢠Installing a Floppy Drive ⢠Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 3 or Position 4 Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format Tape Drive Perform the following procedure to install a CD-ROM or DDS tape drive in the storage tray: 1 Remove the disk filler panel from the top location of the bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt object to pry it from the front, as shown in Figure 28. Figure 28 Removing a Disk Filler Panel
11 0 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 From the rear of the storage tray, line up the disk slides on the CD-ROM or DDS tape drive with the position 1slots in the storage tray chassis, and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 29. Figure 29 Installing a CD-ROM or DDS Tape 3 Push the storage device in until the locking tabs snap into place. 4 Connect the single-ended SCSI-2 data cable and the power cable to the drive. Refer to the cable routing label on the storage tray. 5 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray. CD-ROM or DDS Tape Drive Cable Routing Label
111 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Floppy Drive Perform the following procedure to install a ï¬oppy drive in the storage tray: 1 Remove the disk filler panel from the bottom location of the bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt object to pry it from the front, as shown in Figure 30. Figure 30 Removing a Disk Filler Panel 2 Reach into the storage bay and locate the power and data cables for the floppy drive. Refer to the cable routing label on the storage tray . See Figure 31. 3 Connect the cables to the drive.
11 2 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 4 From the front of the storage tray, line up the disk slides on the floppy drive with the position 2 slots in the storage tray chassis and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 31. Figure 31 Installing a Floppy Drive 5 Push the floppy drive in until the locking tabs snap into place. 6 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray. Cable Routing Label
11 3 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 Perform the following procedure to install a hard disk drive: 1 Remove the disk filler panel from the bottom location of the bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt object to pry it from the front, as shown in Figure 32. Figure 32 Removing a Disk Filler Panel 2 Reach into the storage bay and locate the power and data cables for the disk drive. Refer to the cable routing label on the storage tray . See Figure 33. 3 Connect the cables to the drive. 4 From the front of the storage tray, line up the disk slides on the hard disk drive with the position 1 slots in the storage tray chassis and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 33.
11 4 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Figure 33 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 5 Push the drive in until the locking tabs snap into place. 6 Snap the disk filler panel into the lower bezel position. 7 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray. Cable Routing Label
11 5 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 3 or Position 4 Perform the following procedure to install a hard disk drive in positions 3 or 4 of the storage tray: 1 Remove the two retaining screws from the disk interconnect board, as shown in Figure 34. 2 Remove the fan bracket and disconnect the fan cable. Figure 34 Removing the Disk Interconnect Board 3 Disconnect any cables from the disk interconnect board. 4 Hold the disk interconnect board on the edges and lift it straight up to remove it, as shown in Figure 34.
11 6 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 5 From the rear of the storage tray, line up the disk slides on the hard disk drive with the position 3 or position 4 slots in the storage tray chassis and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 35. Figure 35 Installing a Hard Disk Drive 6 Push the storage device in until the locking tabs snap into place. 7 Connect the SCSI data cable and the power cable to the drive. Cable Routing Label
11 7 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 8 Slide the disk interconnect board into the storage tray, as shown in Figure 36. Figure 36 Installing the Disk Interconnect Board 9 Reconnect the user interface cable, fan cable, and the disk drive data and power cables to the disk interconnect board. 10 Replace the fan bracket. 11 Replace the disk interconnect board retaining screws and tighten them firmly, as shown in Figure 36. 12 Proceed to the section entitled âReplacing the Storage Tray.â
11 8 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Replacing the Storage Tray 1 Slide the storage tray assembly into the system unit chassis, as shown in Figure 37. Figure 37 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 2 Tighten the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 37. 3 Reconnect the power cords to the system unit, the monitor, and any peripherals. Connect the power cords to the ac wall outlets. 4 Power on any peripherals, the monitor, and the system unit. Retaining Screw
11 9 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices If you installed a new hard disk drive, proceed to the section entitled âCon- ï¬guring a Hard Disk Drive.â If you installed a new removable media device, refer to the following chap- ters for information on using the device: ⢠Chapter 2 - Using Your CD-ROM Drive ⢠Chapter 3 - Using Your Digital Data Storage (DDS) Tape Drive ⢠Chapter 4 - Using Your 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive
120 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Configuring a Hard Disk Drive This section describes how to add a hard disk drive to your system as a ï¬le system using SAM. If you installed a new hard disk drive, follow these instructions to make your new disk usable as a ï¬le system. For more infor- mation about conï¬guring a hard disk drive, refer to the System Administra- tion T asks manual. This procedure requires you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as root , contact your system administrator . 1 Log in as root . 2 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN NOTICE: SAM (System Administration Manager) is a utility that performs system administration tasks using a windows graphical user interface. 3 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Periph- eral Devices -> . 4 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Sys- tems -> . 5 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Flop- py , and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens, containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. 6 From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive . 7 The Select a Disk to Add window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the hard disk drive you want to add to your system. 8 Click on OK .
121 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 9 The Set Disk Usage and Options window opens. Select File System and click on OK. 10 The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on OK.
122 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing the Main T ray Assembly Removing the Main Tray Assembly Perform the following steps to remove the main tray assembly: 1 Power off the system, the monitor, and any peripheral devices. Unplug the system unit power cord and the power cord of any peripheral devices from ac wall out- lets. Disconnect the power cord from the system unit. NOTICE: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . 2 Disconnect cables from any peripheral devices. 3 Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to bare metal on the back panel of the system unit. 4 Completely loosen the five thumb screws on the rear of the system unit, as shown in Figure 38. Figure 38 Removing Main Tray Assembly Thumb Screws Thumb Screws
123 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing the Main T ray Assembly 5 Place one hand on the top of the system unit and push, while pulling the handle on the rear panel with your other hand. See Figure 38. 6 Slide the main tray assembly out of the chassis.
124 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Main T ray Assembly Replacing the Main Tray Assembly Perform the following steps to replace the main tray assembly: 1 Align the main tray assembly with the chassis and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 39. Figure 39 Replacing the Main Tray Assembly 2 Slide the main tray in until you feel it make contact with the internal connectors. 3 Push firmly and evenly on the main tray assembly to make sure that all connec- tors are fully seated. 4 Start all five thumb screws loosely, then tighten them firmly. See Figure 39. NOTICE: T o maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that the main tray is fully seated and all four thumb screws are completely tightened. Thumb Screws Thumb Screws
125 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Main T ray Assembly 5 Reconnect the power cables and any other cables that you disconnected when opening the workstation. 6 Power on the monitor , any peripheral devices, and the system unit.
126 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional Memory Installing Additional Memory T ake a moment to read over the following important notes about installing memory . ⢠Before you attempt to install additional memory modules in your C160/C180/ C200/C240/C360 workstation, use the procedure described in Appendix D, âThe Boot Console Interface,â to determine the current memory conï¬guration for this workstation. ⢠Read over the steps involved in installing memory modules before you begin. ⢠You must insert memory modules in pairs of equal size. ⢠Modules must be inserted in the lowest numbered memory connector pair first, then in numerical order. For example, install memory in 0A and 0B first, then 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 3A and 3B, 4A and 4B, and 5A and 5B. Memory slots must be ï¬lled in order from 0A and 0B through 5A and 5B. Refer to Figure 40 for memory pair numbering and location. Insert memory modules in decreasing or- der of memory module size. For example, install 128 MB modules, then 64 MB, 32 MB, and finally, 16 MB modules. ⢠When you have finished installing additional memory modules, use the Boot Console Interface to verify that they are seen by the workstation.
127 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional Memory Perform the following steps to add memory modules to your workstation. 1 Remove the main tray assembly according to the directions in âRemoving the Main Tray Assemblyâ earlier in this appendix. 2 Use Figure 40 to locate the memory modules on the CPU Assembly. Figure 40 C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 Memory Module Location This workstation has 12 memory slots, labeled 0A, 0B through 5A, 5B. The memory conï¬guration is 32 MB to 1.5 GB installed in pairs of 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, or 128 MB memory modules. Memory modules must be installed in pairs of equal capacity . Always install the largest capacity memory modules in the lowest numbered memory slots. For example, if you have a pair of 16 MB memory modules and a pair of 64 MB memory modules, ï¬rst install the pair of 64 MB memory modules in slots 0A and 0B, then install the 16 MB modules in slots 1A and 1B. NOTICE: Memory slots must be ï¬lled in order from 0A and 0B through 5A and 5B. Rear of Main Tray 0A 4A 0B 4B 2A 5A 2B 5B 3A 1A 3B 1B
128 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional Memory 3 Close the ejector tabs on each side of the memory connector to lessen the force needed to seat the memory module. See Figure 41. Figure 41 Installing Memory Modules 4 Place the memory module in the connector, lining it up with the guides. Make sure to put the notched end toward the white ejector tab, as shown in Figure 41. 5 Press firmly and evenly on the memory module to ensure that it seats properly. White Ejector Tab
129 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional Memory 6 Replace the main tray assembly as described in âReplacing the Main Tray As- sembly,â earlier in this appendix. T o verify that this installation was successful, follow the steps in Appendix D, âThe Boot Console Interface,â on displaying memory information. If you have only replaced a faulty memory module, you must issue the pdt clear command in the service menu of the Boot Console Interface. Answer yes ( y) to the prompt â Continue? (Y/N) >.â
130 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) Before installing the EGRAM module, perform the procedure in Removing the Main T ray Assembly on page 122. Perform the following steps to add the EGRAM module to your workstation: 1 Press the release clip and rotate the EISA fan, as shown in Figure 42. Figure 42 Rotating the EISA Fan
131 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 2 Slide the EISA slider to the side to remove it, as shown in Figure 43. 3 Remove the screw from the EISA retainer and remove it, as shown in Figure 43. Figure 43 Removing the EISA Slider and Retainer 4 Grasp the option board by the edge with both hands and pull it straight out. Remove all option boards, making note of which option slot each one was installed in. NOTICE All boards must be replaced in their original slots or your system may not run properly . EISA Slider EISA Retainer
132 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 5 Install the standoffs into the EGRAM module, as shown in Figure 44. Push the standoffs into the holes on the module until the clips fully emgage with the board. 6 Align the connector on the EGRAM module with the connector on the I/O board, while aligning the standoffs with the holes in the I/O board. See Figure 44. Figure 44 Installing the EGRAM Module 7 Connect the EGRAM module to the I/O board. Push down firmly on the connec- tor area to make sure it is fully seated. Push firmly near the standoffs to make sure that they are fully engaged with the I/O board.
133 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 8 Make sure that the EISA fan is fully rotated, as shown in Figure 45. Figure 45 Rotating the EISA Fan 9 Slide the option boards into the slots that they came out of, as shown in Figure 46. Make sure that the hole in each boardâs handle aligns with the pin on the back panel. Figure 46 Installing an Option Board
134 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 10 Press in firmly on both ends of the option board at the same time to make sure that it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. 11 Replace the EISA retainer and its screw, as shown in Figure 47. 12 Replace the EISA slider, as shown in Figure 47. Figure 47 Installing the EISA Retainer and EISA Slider
135 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module (C160/C180) 13 Rotate the fan back into place, as shown in Figure 48. Push it into the rear panel firmly until the clip snaps into place. Figure 48 Securing the Fan 14 Replace the main tray assembly as described in Replacing the Main Tray Assem- bly on page 124.
136 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Y our workstation has 4 option slots, as shown in Figure 49. On C160/C180 workstations, slots 1 and 2 each support either GSC or EISA boards. Slot 3 supports a GSC, EISA, or PCI board. Slot 4 supports a GSC or PCI board. On C200/C240/C360 workstations, slots 1, 2, 3 and 4 each support either GSC or PCI boards. Slot 1 supports a GSC, EISA, or PCI board. Figure 49 Option Slots from Outside the System Unit Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4
137 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Graphics Adapter Considerations If you are installing a graphics option, read the information in this section ï¬rst. Special Video Configuration Statements The following statements apply only to those applications which include a cable connected to the S-V ideo connector on the A4248A card. No modiï¬- cation to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected to other connectors on the card but not to the S- V ideo connector . For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: W ARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. For FCC Applications: NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
138 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Graphics Paths graphics(0) is the built-in 8-plane graphics adapter (C160/C180 only). graphics(1) through graphics(4) are graphics adapters installed in option slots 1 through 4. When a dual display graphics adapter (an adapter which has two video out- put connectors) is installed, the video connector on the left (when looking at the system from the rear) is graphics( NA) and the video connector on the right is graphics (NB), where N is the slot number in which the graphics adapter is installed. A and B denote the two video output connectors on the dual display adapter . For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 3 would be graphics(3A) and graphics(3B).
139 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Graphics Configuration Restrictions This subsection describes restrictions on the installation and support of graphics adapters. Graphics Displays The system supports only four graphics displays at a time. A âdisplayâ is a video output port or connector . For example, the Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) is a dual display card. It has two external video connectors so it accounts for two of the maximum of four displays. Y ou need to install a V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4450A) in addition to the built-in EG Graphics, and the A4451A for a four display system. The built-in graphics adapter ( graphics(0)) accounts for one graphics dis- play . Dual Graphics Adapters Yo u may not install dual display graphics adapters in option slot 1 and option slot 3 at the same time. Installing dual display graphics adapters in option slot 1 and option slot 3 at the same time results in the graphics adapter in slot 1 being disabled. Yo u may not install dual display graphics adapters in option slot 2 and option slot 4 at the same time. Installing dual display graphics adapter in option slot 2 and option slot 4 at the same time reults in the graphics adapter in slot 2 being disabled. Multi-board Graphics Adapters When a V isualize48Z (A4244A) two board graphics adapter is installed, only one other graphics adapter may be installed in the option slots. If the highest numbered slot used by the V isual- ize 48Z board set is an even numbered slot, then you may only install a graphics card in the remaing odd numbered slot. If the highest numbered slot used by the V isualize 48Z board set is an odd numbered slot, then you may only install a graphics card in the remaining even numbered slot. For exam- ple; assuming a V isualize 48Z board set is installed in slots 1 and 2, slot two is the highest numbered slot used and it is an even numbered slot. Therefore you may only install an aditional graphics adapter in slot 3, which is the remaining odd numbered slot. NOTICE: The A4077A Color Graphics Card, A4078A Dual Color Graphics Card, A4079B HCRX-8Z graphics adapter , and the A4071B HCRX-24 graphics adapter with the A4072A Z Accelerator attached are not supported in the Model C160/C180.
140 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Upgrading a C160/180 With an HP VISUALIZE-FX Graphics Adapter When you upgrade a Model C160/180 to use the HP VISUALIZE-FX Graphics Adaptor you also need to upgrade the Model C160/180 power sup- ply . When you upgrade with the HP VISUALIZE-FX A4452A Graphics Adapter you must use the HP VISUALIZE Upgrade Kit, partnumber A4450A. When you upgrade with the HP VISUALIZE-FX A4453A Graphics Adapter you must use the HP VISUALIZE Upgrade Kit, partnumber A4451A. Operation with the older version power supply is not supported.
141 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board Installing the Option Board Follow these steps to install a GSC, EISA, or PCI board into your worksta- tion: 1 Remove the main tray assembly as described in âRemoving the Main Tray As- semblyâ earlier in this appendix. 2 Press the fan release clip and rotate the fan, as shown in Figure 50. Figure 50 Rotating the Fan 3 Remove the screw from the EISA retainer, and remove the EISA retainer, as shown in Figure 51. Figure 51 Removing the EISA Retainer EISA Retainer
142 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 4 Remove the EISA slider, as shown in Figure 52. 5 In the desired EISA slot, turn the blank plateâs locking knob counter-clockwise to unlock the plate, as shown in Figure 52. Figure 52 Removing the EISA Slider and Blank Plate 6 Remove the blank plate from the slot, as shown in Figure 52. Blank Plate Locking Knob EISA Slider
143 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 7 Slide the board into the slot, as shown in Figure 53. Make sure that the hole in the boardâs handle aligns with the pin on the back panel. Figure 53 Installing an Option Board 8 Press in firmly on both ends of the option board at the same time to make sure that it is firmly seated in the backplane connector.
144 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 9 Replace the EISA retainer and its screw, as shown in Figure 54. Figure 54 Installing the EISA Retainer and EISA Slider 10 Replace the EISA slider, as shown in Figure 54.
145 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Board 11 Rotate the fan back into place, as shown in Figure 55. Push it into the rear panel firmly until the clip snaps into place. Figure 55 Securing the Fan 12 Replace the main tray assembly as described in âReplacing the Main Tray As- semblyâ earlier in this appendix.
146 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery Replacing the Battery 1 Remove the main tray as described in âRemoving the Main Tray Assemblyâ earlier in this chapter. 2 Note the orientation of the battery. Make sure that you put the new battery in place with the positive ( ) side facing in the same direction. 3 Lift the clip and slip the battery out of its holder, as shown in Figure 42. Figure 56 Removing the Battery
147 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 4 Insert the new battery in the same orientation as the old one. (Use only HP part number 1420-0314 or equivalent.) NOTICE: If you cannot gain access to the battery , you may need to remove an option board. Refer to âInstalling an EISA, PCI, or GSC Option Boardâ earlier in this appendix for information on accessing the option boards. CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer . Dispose of batteries according to manufacturer â s instructions. A TTENTION: Il y a danger dâexplosion sâil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou dâun type recommandé par le constructeur . Mettre au rébut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. 5 Follow the instructions in âReplacing the Main Tray Assembly,â earlier in this appendix, to close and restart the system.,
148 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype Changing Your Monitor Type Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a speciï¬c resolution and frequency . If you replace your monitor with a different type, you must reconï¬gure your workstation to support it. There are two ways to reconï¬gure your workstation to support a different monitor type: Setting the Monitor Type from the Boot Console Interface T o change your workstationâ s graphics parameters befor e you replace your monitor , go to âDisplaying and Setting the Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix D. Setting the Monitor Type at Power On If you replace your workstationâs monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâs graphics parameters by using the monitor com- mand before doing so, you need to perform the following: If your keyboard connects to the PS/2 connector on your system, wait 2 sec- onds after the Num Lock light ï¬ashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. If you have a keyboard that connects to the HIL connector on your system, press T ab every three seconds during the boot sequence to initiate the auto- matic monitor selection process. Y our system queries you for the new monitor type. Select the new type by pressing Enter . The system queries you to conï¬rm your selection. Press y to save this monitor type. If you donât press y , the system stops cycling. Y ou can use the monitor command in the conï¬guration menu to change monitor type.
149 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype Changing the Console to External Terminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the fol- lowing procedure to display to console to an external terminal: 1 Turn system power off. 2 Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3 Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the top serial connector) on the system rear panel. 4 Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
150 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype
151 C SCSI Connections
152 SCSI Connections This appendix provides information about connecting Small Computer Sys- tem Interface (SCSI) devices to an HP 9000 C160/C180/C200/C240/C360 workstation. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠SCSI bus differences ⢠SCSI restrictions ⢠Determining SCSI bus length ⢠Assigning SCSI device IDs ⢠Connecting to the SCSI ports The instructions in this chapter assume you are using HP-UX version 9.05 or later operating system with HP VUE version 3.0 or later interface. NOTICE When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus. Failure to terminate the SCSI bus will result in erratic device behavior .
153 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences SCSI Bus Differences A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus is an IEEE standard bus for connecting your workstation to internal and external devices (SCSI devices) running at different speeds, singly or in combination. Examples of these SCSI devices are 4-mm DDS-format tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and W in- chester hard disk drives. There are two types of SCSI buses available with this workstation - a nar- row , single-ended SCSI bus (SE SCSI), and a fast, wide differential SCSI bus (FWD SCSI) (on C160/C180/C200-upgrade), or an ultra wide single- ended SCSI bus (Ultra W ide-SE) (C200/C240/C360 only). T able 19 shows the speciï¬cation differences between these SCSI buses, and T able 20 shows the SCSI addresses, ID numbers, and arbitration priorities for each. CAUTION: Do not mix single-ended and fast, wide devices on any one bus type. Doing this will cause a system failure. T able 19 SCSI Bus Differences T ransfer Rate Data Bus Width Maximum Addresses* Maximum Cable Length Device Physical Location Controller Embedded or Plugable Narrow Single- Ended 8 bits 8 6.0 meters (19.6 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 5 Mbytes per second Fast, Wide Dif- ferential 16 bits 16 25 meters (82 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 20 Mbytes per second
154 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences Ultra Wide-SE (C200/C240/ C360 only) 16 bits 16 3 meters (9.84 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 40 Mbytes per second * Address 7 is reserved for host controller use on all buses. T able 19 SCSI Bus Differences T ransfer Rate Data Bus Width Maximum Addresses* Maximum Cable Length Device Physical Location Controller Embedded or Plugable
155 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences T able 20 SCSI Bus Addresses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities SCSI Address SCSI ID Number Priority 15 . . . . . . 8 7 . . . . . . 0 7 . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . 1 6 . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . 2 5 . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . 3 4 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . 4 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . 5 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . 7 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 15 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 14 . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 13 . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 12 . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 10 . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 14 9 . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . 15 8 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 16 8-bit Devices Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus 16-bit Devices Fast, W ide Differential and Ultra, W ide Single Ended SCSI Bus
156 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions SCSI Restrictions This section describes the SCSI restrictions that apply to your workstation in the following areas: ⢠Cables ⢠Connectors and Terminator ⢠SCSI configuration constraints Cables All SCSI devices ship without cables. Only SCSI cables approved by HP can be used to connect your workstation and any SCSI devices. HP offers the following SCSI cables for narrow , single-ended SCSI devices: ⢠K2296 cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠K2297 cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally connected devices to the system fast, wide differential port: ⢠C2911A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally connected devices to the system ultra, wide single-ended port (C200/C240/C360): ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length ⢠C2979A cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length
157 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: SCSI cables approved by HP are designed to function within the SCSI tolerances for HP devices. Use of other cables can result in signiï¬cant problems with system operation. The narrow , singled-ended SCSI implemented on C160/C180/C200/C240/ C360 workstations limits the total cable length of narrow SE SCSI cables to 6 meters (19.6 feet). The fast, wide, differential SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of FW SCSI cables to 25 meters (82 feet). The ultra, wide single-ended SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of ultra, wide-SE SCSI cables to 3 meters (9.84 feet). Always use the shortest possible cable(s) for your conï¬guration. If you are daisy-chaining narrow SE SCSI devices together , use the follow- ing cables: ⢠92222A cable with 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) length ⢠92222B cable with 1.0 meter (3.2 feet) length ⢠92222C cable with 2.0 meter (6.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining FWD SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠C2911A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining ultra, wide-SE SCSI devices together , use the fol- lowing cable: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length NOTICE See âDetermining SCSI Bus Lengthâ later in this Appendix to determine the total length of your cables.
158 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions Connectors and Terminators Any narrow , SE SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 50-pin high-density thumb screw connector on the end connecting to the system board. Any fast, wide differential or ultra, wide-SE SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 68-pin high-density thumb screw connector on both ends. NOTICE The terminators for fast, wide differential SCSI and ultra, wide-SE SCSI are different and not compatible, even though the connectors are identical. It is necessary to put a terminator on empty SCSI connectors on the back panel of the system. Also, a SCSI device attached to the SCSI bus or the last external device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order ter- minator C2904A (for 50-pin connectors) or C2905A (for 68-pin fast, wide differential connectors) or C2972A (for 68-pin ultra, wide-SE connectors) from Hewlett-Packard.
159 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions SCSI Configuration Constraints Y ou are limited to the number of same-type SCSI devices per system. Before adding another SCSI device, determine if the system can support the addi- tional device. This workstation offers the following types of SCSI bus, each with its own conï¬guration constraints: ⢠Narrow, Single-ended SCSI bus (C160/C180/C200 /C240/C360) ⢠Fast, Wide Differential SCSI bus (C160/C180/C200 upgrade) ⢠Ultra, Wide-Single-Ended SCSI bus (C200 /C240/C360 only) Narrow, Single-ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints For the NSE SCSI bus, HP-UX supports only one of each type of removable disk drive and two of the same type tape devices per system. T able 21 shows conï¬guration constraints for each NSE SCSI device type. If the system has an internal CD-ROM drive or DDS tape drive, you must count them as NSE SCSI devices. T able 21 NSE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints NSE SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Hard Disk Drives (external only) 7 CD-ROM Drives (one internal) 1 4-mm DDS T ape Drives (one internal) 2 9-track T ape Drives 2 650-MB Magneto-Optical Drives 1 Magneto-Optical Autochangers (see notice below) 1 Maximum Number of NSE SCSI Devices 7 NOTICE: Magneto-Optical Autochangers use three NSE SCSI drive address. Each ad- dress must be accounted for in the maximum number of NSE SCSI devices al- lowed.
160 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended SCSI, fast, wide differential SCSI, or ultra, wide- SE SCSI peripherals on the same SCSI bus. Fast, Wide, Differential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints FWD SCSI does not work with either SE SCSI. T able 22 shows the conï¬guration constraints for each FWD SCSI device type. CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended, fast, wide differential, or ultra, wide-SE SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Ultra, wide single-ended SCSI does not work with narrow , single ended or fast wide differential SCSI. T able 22 shows the conï¬guration constraints for each ultra, wide- SE SCSI device type. CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended, fast, wide differential, or ultra, wide-SE SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. T able 22 FWD SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints FWD SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed FWD SCSI Disk Drive (up to 2 internal) 15 FWD SCSI Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 7 T able 23 Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI Disk Drive (up to 2 internal) 4 Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 1
161 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Determining SCSI Bus Length This section helps you to determine the total length of the narrow , single- ended SCSI bus, the fast, wide differential SCSI bus and ultra, wide single- ended SCSI bus. Narrow, Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total narrow , single-ended SCSI bus length (including the system unit, external SCSI devices, and SCSI interconnect cables) using T able 24: 1 Find all of your external SCSI devices in the first column. In the third column, write the SCSI bus lengths (from the second column) that correspond to your de- vices. NOTICE In the third column, the length for the System Unit is already listed. This number must always be used for the system unit. 2 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â 3 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 4 Add the subtotals together and write the total in the Total SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE The total length of the narrow , single-ended SCSI bus must not exceed 6 meters (19.6 feet). If the number you write for T otal SCSI Bus Length is greater than 6 meters (19.6 feet), try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables.
162 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: __________ __________ T otal SCSI Bus Length = __________ (T otal narrow , single-ended SCSI bus length not to exceed 6 meters [19.6 feet]) T able 24 Bus Length W orksheet for Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Bus SCSI Device Internal SCSI Bus Length meters (feet) Device Internal Length meters (feet) External Cable Length meters (feet) System Unit 1.3 (4.3) 1.3 (4.26) N/A A2655A 0.3 (1.0) C1520B 0.2 (0.7) C1521B 0.2 (0.7) C1700C 1.1 (3.6) C1701C 0.3 (1.0) C1704C 0.0 (0.0) C1705C 0.0 (0.0) C2213A 1.5 (4.9) C2217T 1.3 (4.3)
163 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total bus length for the fast, wide differential SCSI bus on your system, using T able 25. 1 List all of your internal fast, wide differential SCSI devices in the first column. 2 In the third column, write the lengths of the internal fast, wide differential SCSI bus that correspond to your devices. 3 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the fast, wide differential SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) 4 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write the sum on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 5 Add the subtotals together and write the total on the Total Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Bus Length line. NOTICE: The total length of thefast, wide differentila SCSI bus must not exceed 25 meters (82 feet). If the number you write for T otal Fast, W ide Differential SCSI Bus Length is greater than 25 meters, try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables.
164 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: ______________ ________ T otal Fast, W ide Differential SCSI Bus Length = ______________ (T otal fast, wide differential SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 25 meters [82 feet]) T able 25 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Bus Length W orksheet Fast, Wide Differential Device Internal Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Bus Length meters(feet) Device Internal Length meters(feet) External Cable Length meters(feet) System Unit 1.5 (4.9) [1.1 (3.61) C200 /C240 only] N/A C3034T 1.0 (3.3) C3035T 1.0 (3.3) C3036T 1.0 (3.3)
165 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Ultra, Wide, Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total bus length for the ultra, wide, sin- gle-ended SCSI bus on your system, using T able 26. 1 List all of your internal Ultra, Wide SCSI devices in the first column. 2 In the third column, write the lengths of the internal Ultra, Wide SCSI bus that correspond to your devices. 3 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the Ultra, Wide SCSI intercon- nect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsec- tion âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) 4 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write the sum on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 5 Add the subtotals together and write the total on the Total Ultra, Wide SCSI Bus Length line. NOTICE: The total length of the Ultra, W ide, Single-ended SCSI bus must not exceed 3 meters (9.84 feet). If the number you write for T otal Ultra, W ide SCSI Bus Length is greater than 3 meters, try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables.
166 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: ______________ ________ T otal Ultra, W ide SE SCSI Bus Length = ______________ (T otal ultra, wide SE SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 3 meters [9.84 feet]) T able 26 Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length W orksheet Ultra, Wide SE Device Internal Ultra, Wide SE SCSI Bus Length meters(feet) Device Internal Length meters(feet) External Cable Length meters(feet) System Unit 1.1 (3.61) N/A Device _______ 1.0 (3.3) Device _______ 1.0 (3.3) Device _______ 1.0 (3.3)
167 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs Assigning SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your existing SCSI device IDs. T o determine which SCSI device IDs are available for your device, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1 At a command line prompt, enter the following: /usr/sbin/ioscan -f After a few moments, the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ================================================================================ bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_ NEXUS bc 1 8 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 0 8/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI target 0 8/12.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 3 8/12.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE QUANTUM LPS1080WD target 1 8/12.5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 2 8/12.5.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW target 2 8/12.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8/12.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW ba 0 8/16 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter ext_bus 2 8/16/0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface audio 0 8/16/1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Audio tty 0 8/16/4 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ext_bus 1 8/16/5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in SCSI target 3 8/16/5.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8/16/5.2.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA target 4 8/16/5.3 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE tape 0 8/16/5.3.0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A target 5 8/16/5.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 10 8/16/5.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N target 6 8/16/5.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 5 8/16/5.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE MICROP 2112 lan 0 8/16/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in LAN ps2 0 8/16/7 ps2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Keyboard/Mouse bc 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 3 10/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC add on Fast/Wide SCSI target 7 10/12.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 6 10/12.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST31200W graphics 2 10/16 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ba 1 10/20 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter hil 0 10/20/1 hil CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in HIL tty 1 10/20/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ba 2 10/20/5 eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Bus Adapter ext_bus 4 10/20/5/3 hshpib CLAIMED INTERFACE EISA card HWP0C70 target 8 10/20/5/3.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE target 9 10/20/5/3.1 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE target 10 10/20/5/3.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
168 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs 2 You can tell which SCSI IDs are currently in use by looking under the H/W Path heading. The listing 8/16/5 scsi is the built-in SCSI bus controller. For devices connected to the built-in SCSI bus, such as disks, the fourth number is the SCSI ID for that device. For example, the listing 8/16/5.4.0 in the sample device list tells you that there is a SCSI device (a disk) currently using ID 4 on the SCSI bus. Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check what SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 27: 1 Write in the SCSI device ID of any internal devices connect to the narrow, single- ended SCSI bus in Table 27. 2 Write in the device ID of any eternal devices connect to the narrow, single-ended SCSI bus. 3 Add your new drive to the table as either an internal or an external device. NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI addresses, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the SCSI bus. 4 Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. You can use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. See the drive installation documentation for information on changing the device ID.
169 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI bus controller . T able 27 Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (Only 0 through 6 A vailable) Internal External Internal System Drives: CD-ROM Drive (if present, uses ID No.2) __________ N/A 4-mm DDS T ape Drive (if present, uses ID No.1) __________ N/A Internal Device Drives __________ N/A 1st Internal Device __________________ __________ N/A 2nd Internal Device __________________ __________ N/A External Device Drives N/A __________ 1st External Device __________________ N/A __________ 2nd External Device __________________ N/A __________ 3rd External Device __________________ N/A __________ 4th External Device __________________ N/A __________ 5th External Device __________________ N/A __________ 6th External Device __________________ N/A __________ 7th External Device __________________ N/A __________ NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 7 single-ended SCSI devices (internal and external) connected to the system.
170 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs Fast, Wide Differential SCSI IDs (C160/C180/C200 Upgrades) Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 28. 1 Write in the type of each device currently connected to your system under the heading âFast, Wide Differential SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 2 Add your new drive to the table. 3 Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new fast, wide SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able 28 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Device Drives and Device ID Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device ______________________________ __________ 2nd Internal Device ______________________________ __________ 1st External Device _______________________________ __________ 2nd External Device _______________________________ __________ 3rd External Device _______________________________ __________ 4th External Device _______________________________ __________ NOTICE: You can have no more than 15 SCSI devices connected to a fast, wide bus.
171 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs Ultra, Wide SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 29. 1 Write in the type of each device currently connected to your system under the heading âUltra, Wide SE SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 2 Add your new drive to the table. 3 Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new ultra, wide SE SCSI de- vice ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for informa- tion on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able 29 Ultra, Wide SE SCSI Device Drives and Device ID Ultra, Wide SE SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device ______________________________ __________ 2nd Internal Device ______________________________ __________ 1st External Device ______________________________ __________ 2nd External Device ______________________________ __________ NOTICE: You can have no more than 4 SCSI devices connected to a ultra, wide SE bus.
172 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports Connecting to the SCSI Ports This section describes how to connect to the system SCSI ports (narrow sin- gle-ended and fast, wide differential or ultra, wide single-ended). System SCSI Port Connection The system contains two (2) SCSI connectors: ⢠System Narrow, Single-Ended SCSI Connector ⢠System Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Connector (C160/C180/C200 upgrade) or Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI Connector (C200 /C240/C360) Figure 57 shows the two SCSI connectors. SCSI cables connect to these ports with a high-density thumb screw connector . Figure 57 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without Terminators Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Narrow Single-ended SCSI Ultra, Wide-SE (C200/C240/C360)
173 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports NOTICE: It is necessary to put a terminator on empty SCSI connectors on the backpanel, or the last device connected to the SCSI bus. T erminators are shipped with the system. Do mix Fast, W ide and Ultra, W ide-SE terminators.
174 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports
175 D The Boot Console Interface
176 The Boot Console Interface This appendix describes the different features of the boot console interface and how to use them. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠Boot console interface features ⢠Accessing the boot console interface ⢠Booting your workstation ⢠Searching for bootable media ⢠Resetting your workstation ⢠Displaying and setting paths ⢠Displaying and setting the monitor type ⢠Displaying the current memory configuration ⢠Displaying the status of the System I/O ⢠Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search flags ⢠Displaying and setting the Security mode ⢠Displaying and setting the Fastboot mode ⢠Displaying the LAN station address ⢠Displaying system information ⢠Displaying PIM information
177 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features Boot Console Interface Features There are times when you want to interact directly with the hardware of your workstation before it boots the operating system. Y our workstation provides a menu-driven boot console interface that allows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain system parameters, even if the operating system is unavailable. Here are some of the things you can do: ⢠Boot your workstation ⢠Search for bootable media ⢠Reset your workstation ⢠Display and set boot paths ⢠Display and set your monitor type ⢠Display memory configuration information ⢠Display the status of the EISA, GSC, and PCI slots ⢠Set Auto Boot and Auto Search ⢠Set Fastboot ⢠Display LAN information ⢠Display system information ⢠Display PIM information NOTICE: All of the tasks in the boot console interface should be performed by a system administrator . The boot console menus follow , showing the various tasks you can perform and the information available. The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters. Help is available for all the menus and commands by using either help, he, or ? and the menu or command you want help on.
178 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Main Menu ----------------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY][<path>]Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices COnfiguration [<command>] Access Configuration menu/commands INformation [<command>] Access Information menu/commands SERvice [<command>] Access Service menu/commands DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system ------ Main Menu: Enter command >
179 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Configuration Menu -------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- AUto [BOot|SEArch] [ON|OFF] Display or set specified auto flag BootID [<proc>] [<boot ID>] Display or modify processor boot ID BootINfo Display boot-related information BootTimer [0 - 200] Seconds allowed for boot attempt CPUconfig {<proc>] [ON|OFF] Config/deconfig processor DEfault Set the system to predefined values FastBoot [ON|OFF] Display or set boot tests execution LanConfig [<params>] Display or set LAN configuration MOnitor [LIST|<path> <type>] Change the current monitor type PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>] Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices SECure [ON|OFF] Set/show security mode TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s] Read or set real time clock in GMT BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Configuration Menu: Enter command >
180 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Information Menu ---------------------------------------------- Command Description ----------- ----------- ALL Display all system information BootINfo Display boot-related information CAche Display cache information ChipRevisions Display revisions of VLSI and firmware COprocessor Display coprocessor information FwrVersion Display firmware version IO Dispay I/O interface information LanAddress Display built-in system LAN address MEmory Display memory information PRocessor Display processor information WArnings Display selftest warning messages BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command> Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Information Menu: Enter command >
181 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Service Menu -------------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- ChassisCodes [<proc>|ON|OFF] Display/enable/disable chassis codes CLEARPIM Clear (zero) the contents of PIM EepromRead [<addr>] {<len>] Read EEPROM locations MemRead <addr> [<len>] [a] Read memory locations PciDelay [<value>] Display or set PCI delay value PDT [CLEAR] Display or clear the Page Deallocation Table PIM [<proc> [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]] Display PIM information BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Service Menu: Enter command >
182 The Boot Console Interface Accessing the Boot Console Interface Accessing the Boot Console Interface T o access the boot console interface, follow these steps: NOTICE: This procedure should be done by a system administrator . 1 Close any files and applications on your workstation. 2 Press the power switch on the front panel of the system unit. NOTICES: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . Make sure that you do not unplug the systemâ s power cord or otherwise interrupt power to the system unit at this time. 3 When the system has completely shut down, power on your workstation. If Autoboot is turned off, the boot sequence automatically stops at the boot console Main Menu. If Autoboot is turned on, you will see the following messages: Processor is starting Autoboot process. To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. If Autoboot and Autosearch are both turned on, you will see the following mes- sages: Processor is booting from first available device.To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. NOTICE: If you are using a power-saving monitor , you will have less than 10 seconds from the time this message appears to press a key . 4 Press a key. You will then see the message: Boot terminated The Main Menu of the boot console appears.
183 The Boot Console Interface Booting Y our Workstation Booting Your Workstation Usually , you start your workstation by turning it on and waiting for HP-UX to boot automatically . However , you may not always want the usual sequence to occur . For example, you may want to start your workstation from an operating sys- tem that is stored on a device that is different from your usual boot device. If your normal operating system kernel or the disk on which it resides becomes damaged or unusable, you may wish to boot from a different disk or perhaps another type of device, such as a DDS-format tape drive. Here are some situations and examples: ⢠If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a bootable operating system, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Con- sole Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, speciï¬ed in Mnemonic Style Notation. For example, if you wish to boot an operating system that is stored on a DDS- format tape in a drive that is located at â âsescsi.1.0â â, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following command at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot sescsi.1.0 The operating system on the speciï¬ed device is used to start your workstation. ⢠If you wish to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) before booting your workstation, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ ear- lier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device Y ou are prompted: Interact with IPL (Y,N,Q)>
184 The Boot Console Interface Booting Y our Workstation Answering yes ( y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the speciï¬ed device. After a short time, the following prompt appears on your screen: ISL> ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HP-UX operating system. If you do not want ISL to be loaded, you must enter n. For example, if the usual kernel ( /stand/vmunix) on your root disk ( fwscsi.6.0) has become corrupted, and you wish to boot your workstation from the backup kernel ( /stand/vmunix.prev), type the following at the ISL> prompt: ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev ⢠If you do not know which media in your ï¬le systems have bootable oper- ating systems, you can ï¬nd them with the sear ch IPL command.
185 The Boot Console Interface Searching for Bootable Media Searching for Bootable Media T o list devices that contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccess- ing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl The search command searches all buses. The search may turn up more devices than there are lines on your display . If you are using a text terminal, you may control the progress of the search from your terminalâ s keyboard by performing the following steps: ⢠T o hold the display temporarily , press Ctrl S. ⢠To continue the display, press Ctrl Q. ⢠To halt the search, press any other key These ï¬ow-control commands do not work with a bitmapped display , but such a display can show more than forty lines of text, so you are unlikely to need them. T o search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl device_type Where device_type is one of the following: fwscsi is the built-in fast, wide SCSI bus (or ultra, wide-SE on C200). sescsi is the built-in single-ended SCSI bus. lan is all connections to the built-in LAN. gsc n is an optional fast, wide SCSI interface in slot number n.
186 The Boot Console Interface Resetting Y our Workstation Resetting Your Workstation T o reset your workstation, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Con- sole Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > reset T o reset your workstation to its predeï¬ned values, follow the directions in "Accessing the Boot Console Interface" earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt to access the Conï¬guration Menu: Main Menu: Enter command > co When the Conï¬guration Menu appears, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > default
187 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths Displaying and Setting Paths A path is the hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. The path command sets the system paths shown in T able 30. The path command sets and displays the hardware address of a speciï¬ed device attached to the I/O bus of your workstation. T o display the current settings for the system paths, type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path T able 30 System Paths Path T ype Device primary or pri Y our workstationâ s default boot device (usually the root disk) alternate or alt Y our workstationâ s alternate boot device (usually a DDS-format tape device) console or con Y our workstationâ s primary display device keyboard or key Y our workstationâ s primary ASCII input device
188 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths The paths are displayed in Mnemonic Style Notation, as shown in T able 31. T o display the current setting for a particular system path, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able 30. For example, to get the path to the primary boot device, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path primary T o set a system path to a new value, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type path where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able 30 and path is the speciï¬cation of the path in Mnemonic Style Notation (as described in T able 31). For example, to set the primary boot path to a SCSI disk with an ID of 6.0, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path pri sescsi.6.0 T able 31 Mnemonic Style Notation I/O T ype Speciï¬cation Format Built-in UWSCSI fwsci. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Built-in FWSCSI fwsci. scsi_address. logical_unit_number Built-in SCSI sescsi. scsi_address. logical_unit_number Optional gsc n. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Built-in LAN lan. server_addr ess .init_timeout.io_timeout
189 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a speciï¬c resolution and frequency . If you replace your workstationâ s monitor with a different type of monitor , you must reconï¬gure your workstation to support the new monitor . The Monitor Command The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics conï¬g- uration. This command is available in Conï¬guration Menu of the boot con- sole interface. NOTICE: The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics conï¬guration before you replace your monitor . For information about changing the conï¬guration after you replace your monitor , refer to âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix B. T o display the current graphics and console information, enter the following command; monitor The correct usage for setting the graphics conï¬guration is: monitor graphics_path type where valid graphics_path parameters are: graphics(0) - The built-in 8-plane graphics adapter . graphics(1 ) through graphics(4) - Graphics adapters installed in option slots 1 through 4. and type is the numerical monitor type
190 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype When a dual display graphics adapter (an adapter which has two video out- put connectors) is installed, the video connector on the left (when looking at the system from the rear) is graphics( NA) and the video connector on the right is graphics( NB). Where N is the slot number in which the graphics adapter is installed. For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 3 would be graphics(3A) and graphics(3B). NOTICE: There are graphics conï¬guration restrictions of which you must be aware when adding graphics adapters or reconï¬guring your graphics devices. For details on graphics conï¬guration restrictions, see the subsection â Graphics Configuration Restrictionsâ in Appendix B. Displaying the Current Monitor Configuration T o display the current monitor conï¬guration for your system from the Con- ï¬guration Menu of the boot console interface, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, enter: Main Menu: Enter command > configuration This places you in the Conï¬guration Menu. From here, enter: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor The screen displays a list of the current graphics adapters and their monitor types conï¬gured for your workstation. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class ----------- ---- ---- -------- ---------- ---- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 75Hz 12 Configuration Menu: Enter command > In this example, only the built-in graphic adapter graphics(0) is conï¬gured. The monitor type for graphics(0) is set to type 12, which is a 1280 by 1024 monitor that uses a frequency of 75 Hz.
191 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Setting the Monitor Type Y ou can set the monitor type for a graphics adapter by entering the follow- ing: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics( n) tt Where n is the number of the graphics adapter and tt is the monitor type. T o display a list of supported monitors, enter the following command; Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor list A list of valid monitor types similar to the following is displayed; MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 1 1280x1024 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 2 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 3 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 4 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 5 1024x768 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 6 800x600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 7 640x480 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 8 1600x1200 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 9 1600x1200 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 10 1200x1600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 11 1200x1600 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 75Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 13 1280x1024 75Hz Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 14 640x480 60Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 15 --------user defined------- Configuration Menu: Enter command >
192 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype T o set the monitor type for graphics(0) to monitor type 2, enter the follow- ing; Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 This will take effect on the next reboot. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class ----------- ---- ---- -------- ---------- ---- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 75Hz 2 The boot console displays a message that tells you that your new monitor selection will take affect the next time you reboot your system. The boot console also displays the new monitor information. T rying to change the monitor type to a number not listed for that graphics device fails and gives you the following warning message: Value of monitor type n out of range (n - nn) T rying to change the monitor type on an empty slot fails and gives you the following warning message: No such graphics card. Changing the monitor type to 0 forces the system to poll for monitor type during the next time your reboot your system.
193 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Setting the Monitor Type at Power On If you replace your workstationâs monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâs graphics parameters by using the monitor com- mand before doing so, you need to perform the following: If your keyboard connects to the PS/2 connector on your system, wait 2 sec- onds after the Num Lock light ï¬ashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. NOTICE: It takes approximately one to two minutes after powering on the workstation before the Num Lock light ï¬ashes. If you have a keyboard that connects to the HIL connector on your system, press T ab every three seconds during the boot sequence to initiate the auto- matic monitor selection process. The system cycles through all of the available monitor types one at a time. When you can see a message similar to the following clearly and legigbly , select that monitor type by pressing Enter . MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ----------- ---- ---- ---- ---------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 n nnnnxnnnn nnHz Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type (type n of n types). The system queries you to conï¬rm your selection. Press Y to save this mon- itor type. If you press any key other than Y , the following message is displayed: Monitor type not saved. At this point, the new monitor type is active, but not saved. Because you didnât save the monitor type, the next time you reboot the system the original monitor type will be used. Next, the following message is displayed: To select a new Graphics Monitor Type press the <TAB> key now, otherwise EXIT by entering any other key (or will time out in 15 seconds)... T o restart the monitor selection process, press T AB .
194 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Changing the Console to External Terminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the fol- lowing procedure to display to console to an external terminal: 1 Turn system power off. 2 Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3 Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the top serial connector) on the system rear panel. 4 Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
195 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Displaying the Current Memory Configuration The following sample screen output using the memory command shows: ï¬rst, a memory conï¬guration table with properly-installed and conï¬gured memory (Sample Output 1); and second, output when a SIMM has been improperly installed (Sample Output 2). T o display the current memory conï¬guration for your system, from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, type: Main Menu: Enter command > information This places you in the Information Menu. From here type: Information Menu: Enter command > memory The screen displays status and conï¬guration information for the memory DIMMs installed in your workstation. The ï¬rst listing below shows the memory information for a system with correctly installed and conï¬gured memory modules. The second listing shows the information for a system that has memory modules incorrectly installed of conï¬gured.
196 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Memory Information Sample 1 The following sample shows the memory information when memory mod- ules are properly installed and conï¬gured MEMORY INFORMATION MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ---- --------- ------ 0a/b 64MB Configured 1a/b 32MB Configured 2a/b 128MB Configured --------- TOTAL 224MB DETAILED MEMORY CONFIGURATION TABLE SPA GROUP SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status Size Slot --- ----- --- ---------- ---- ----------- ---- ---- 0x00000000 1 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0 Configured 3 Configured 64MB 0a/b 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0x0c000000 0 2 Configured 0 Configured 16MB 1a/b 2 Configured 2 Configured 16MB 1a/b Group 1 interleaved 2 ways over 3 banks Group 0 interleaved 2 ways over 2 banks BAD MEMORY TABLE SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status SIMM Size Slot --- ---------- ---- ----------- --------- ---- 0 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 1 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 0a/b 2 Present 1 Not Present 0MB 3a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 3a/b Active, installed memory (bytes) : 234881024 of Standard DRAM Deallocated pages (bytes) - 0 ----------- Available Memory (bytes) : 234881024 Good Memory Required by OS (bytes): 0 (Not Set by OS) Memory HVERSION SVERSION -------- ---------- 0x0710 0x0900
197 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Memory Information Sample 2 The following sample shows the memory information when memory mod- ules are not properly installed and conï¬gured. In this sample the memory module in memory slot 1A is missing. MEMORY INFORMATION WARNING: Memory has been reconfigured due to a physical change or because the Page Deallocation Table (PDT) was cleared. This is for information only. No action is required. MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ---- --------- ------ 0a/b 64MB Configured 1a/b ??MB SIMM not seated properly. 2a/b 128MB Configured --------- TOTAL 192MB DETAILED MEMORY CONFIGURATION TABLE SPA GROUP SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status Size Slot --- ----- --- ---------- ---- ----------- ---- ---- 0x00000000 0 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0 Configured 3 Configured 64MB 0a/b 1 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b Group 0 interleaved 2 ways over 3 banks BAD MEMORY TABLE SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status SIMM Size Slot --- ---------- ---- ----------- --------- ---- 0 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 1 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 0a/b 2 Present 0 Sizing Error 0MB 1a/b 1 Not Present 0MB 3a/b 2 Sizing Error 0MB 1a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 3a/b Active, installed memory (bytes) : 201326592 of Standard DRAM Deallocated pages (bytes) - 0 ----------- Available Memory (bytes) : 201326592 Good Memory Required by OS (bytes): 0 (Not Set by OS) Memory HVERSION SVERSION -------- ---------- 0x0710 0x0900
198 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Status of the System I/O Displaying the Status of the System I/O The IO command lets you identify all built-in I/O devices and optional I/O devices installed in the option slots. It is available in the Information Menu. T o use the IO command from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, type: Information Menu: Enter command > IO Information about the built-in and optional I/O devices is displayed. An example from a C160 or C180 workstation is listed below . I/O MODULE INFORMATION IODC IODC Path Decimal Type Location HVER SVER Vers Dep ------------ ------- ------------------------- ---------- ---- ---- ---- ---- 8/0 8/0 Bus Bridge built-in 6800 0a00 0x00 0x00 FWSCSI 8/12 A DMA I/O built-in 03b0 8980 0x96 0x00 8/16 8/16 Bus Adapter built-in 03b0 8100 0x00 0x00 8/16/0 8/16/0 Parallel built-in 03b0 7400 0x00 0x00 8/16/1 8/16/1 Audio built-in 03b4 7b00 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_1 8/16/4 RS232 built-in 03b0 8c00 0x01 0x00 SESCSI 8/16/5 SE SCSI built-in 03b0 8200 0x96 0x00 LAN 8/16/6 LAN built-in 03b0 8a00 0x02 0x00 PS2 8/16/7 Keyboard built-in 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/8 8/16/8 Mouse built-in 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/10 8/16/10 Floppy built-in 03b0 8300 0x00 0x00 8/20 8/20 Bus Adapter built-in 0170 8e00 0x00 0x00 HIL 8/20/1 HIL built-in 0170 7300 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_2 8/20/2 RS232 Port built-in 0170 8c00 0x00 0x00 EISA 8/20/5 Bus Adapter built-in 0170 9000 0x00 0x00 GRAPHICS(0) 8/24 INTERNAL_EG_X128 built-in 0160 8500 0x01 0x00 8/63 8/63 Bus Converter built-in 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 10/63 10/63 Bus Converter built-in 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 EISA Cards Path Type EISA ID ---- ---- ------- 8/20/5/1 EISA slot is empty 8/20/5/2 EISA slot is empty 8/20/5/3 EISA slot is empty PCI Cards Slot Path Bus Class ---- -------------------------------- --- ------------------
199 The Boot Console Interface Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags auto boot and auto sear ch are variables stored in your workstationâ s non- volatile memory . (Nonvolatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset these ï¬ags to new value, the change takes ef fect the next time you reboot the workstation. auto boot boots the operating system whenever your workstation is turned on. T o examine the state of the auto boot and auto search ï¬ags, type the fol- lowing at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto If auto boot is set to on , your workstation automatically attempts to boot the operating system when turned on. If auto boot is set to off, your workstation enters the boot administration mode of the boot console user interface. The state of the auto sear ch ï¬ag determines how your workstation seeks a boot device during autoboot. If auto sear ch is set to on , your workstation will search for other boot devices if the primary boot device is not available. If auto search is off , your workstation will default to the boot administration mode if it canât see the primary boot device. T o change the state of the auto boot or auto search ï¬ags, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto boot state or Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto search state where state is on or off.
200 The Boot Console Interface Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags Autosearch searches for devices in the following order: Primary boot path Alternate boot path Built-in fast, wide SCSI devices (or ultra, wide SCSI on C200 /C240) GSC card in slot 1 PCI card in slot 1 GSC card in slot 2 PCI card in slot 2 GSC card in slot 3 PCI card in slot 3 GSC card in slot 4 PCI card in slot 4 Built-in single-ended SCSI devices Built-in LAN bootp servers NOTICE: SCSI adapter option cards installed in the option slots are not searched unless they are referenced by the primary or alternate boot paths. EISA cards are not searched.
201 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Security Mode Displaying and Setting the Security Mode The SECur e ï¬ag is a variable stored in non-volatile memory . (Non-volatil- memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset this ï¬ag to a new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot the workstation. When the SECur e ï¬ag is set to on , autoboot and autosearch are enabled and cannot be stopped. The system boots from the default boot paths regard- less of user intervention. T o display the current setting for the SECure ï¬ag, enter the following com- mand: secure T o set the SECure ï¬ag on or off, enter one of the following: secure on secure off
202 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode When fastboot is enabled (set to on), your workstation does a quick check of the memory and skips I/O interface testing, and processor and cache self- testing during its power-on self tests. This enables your workstation to com- plete its boot process quicker . The default factory setting is for fastboot to be enabled ( on). The fastboot mode allows your workstation to boot quickly by performing a less extensive check of the systemâ s memory . When fastboot is disabled (set to off), more extensive memory testing and I/O interface testing is performed during the self tests, causing the boot pro- cess to take longer . If you are experiencing difï¬culty in booting your workstation, set fastboot to off and reboot the system. The more extensive testing may reveal the error condition. T o display the status of fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot T o disable fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot off T o enable fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot on
203 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the LAN Station Address Displaying the LAN Station Address It is sometimes necessary to supply a LAN station address of your worksta- tion to other users. For example, if your workstation is to become a member of a cluster , the cluster administrator needs to know your LAN station address in order to add your workstation to the cluster . A LAN station address of your workstation is the label that uniquely identi- ï¬es the LAN connection for your workstation at the link level (the hardware level). T o display your workstationâ s LAN station addresses, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > lanaddress The LAN station address is displayed as a twelve-digit number in hexadeci- mal notation, similar to the following: LAN Station Addresses: 080009-789abc The address is for the systemâ s built-in LAN.
204 The Boot Console Interface Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings Configure and Display LAN Settings The LanConï¬g command conï¬gures and displays the current LAN settings. The C180, C200, C240 and C360 systems support 10Base-T , 100Base-T and AUI standards. T o automatically select the network speed (100 Mbits/sec or 10 Mbits/sec) and data transfer operation (full or half duplex) , operating in compliance with IEEE 802.3u , type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUTO_detect T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Half_dx T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Full_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Half_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Full_dx T o select the AUI port (10 Mbits/sec, half duplex only), type the following at the prompt:
205 The Boot Console Interface Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUI NOTE: The LAN setting defaults to LAN-TP(RJ45). If that setting fails, the system tries the LAN-AUI setting. Also note that the new lan configuration settings take effect at the next BOot or SEArch command.
206 The Boot Console Interface Displaying System Information Displaying System Information The all command allows you to display the systemâ s processor revision and speed, cache size, memory size, ï¬ag settings, and the boot and console paths. T o display system information from the Information Menu, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > all This information is paged to allow you to view it as necessary .
207 The Boot Console Interface Displaying PIM Information Displaying PIM Information The pim command allows you to display the most recent PIM information for the speciï¬ed fault type. T o display PIM information for a speciï¬c fault, from the Service Menu, type the following at the prompt: Service Menu: Enter command > pim processor_number Y ou can use pim in the following ways: pim - gives all fault types pim 0 - HPMC information on processor pim 0 fault_type - fault type information on processor
208 The Boot Console Interface Displaying PIM Information
209 Glossary absolute pathname The full pathname of a file, including all the directories leading to it, starting with the root direc- tory (â/â) and ending with the filename itself. See also file, filename, path- name . access permissions Settings that allow a user or group of users to read, write, or execute files. See also file access per- missions . active window The window that is re- ceiving input from the keyboard at the present time. If there is no active win- dow, anything you type is lost. Only one window can be active at a time. The ac- tive window is said to have the âkey- board focus.â ANSI The American National Stan- dards Institute, a non-profit organization, made up of various expert committees, that publishes standards for use by na- tional industries. ANSI has adopted the IEEE standards for local area networks. argument The part of a command line that identifies the file or directory to be acted on. attachment unit interface (AUI) A transceiver cable that conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications. back up v. To make a copy of the file system on a tape or disk that can be stored separately from the original files. Also called âbacking up the systemâ or simply âsystem backup.â bitmap Generally speaking, an array of data bits used for graphic images. Strict- ly speaking, a pixmap of depth one, ca- pable of representing 2-color images. boot Short for bootstrap service . A ser- vice provided by a short program, stored in the read-only memory of your work- station, that loads the operating system (or any complex program) into main memory. Partner workstations provide bootstrap service to diskless worksta- tions. See also boot ROM. boot console interface The interactive firmware that enables you to interact with the hardware of your workstation before the workstation boots the operat- ing system. The boot console interface allows you to perform special tasks, dis- play information, and set certain system parameters. boot ROM A read-only memory that is incorporated into a workstation for the purpose of starting the operating system, testing the terminal, and producing a standard display. bootstrap service See boot . byte A fundamental character-code unit, usually consisting of 8 bits. CD-ROM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory. See also CD-ROM disc, CD- ROM drive . CD-ROM disc CD-ROM discs are identical to the audio compact discs (CDs) used to record stereo music, ex- cept that they store data. CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 inches) in diameter, and use one data surface with a capacity of 600 MB. The data surface contains pits
210 Glossary and flat spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. CD-ROM drive A random-access, read-only, mass-storage device that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for read- ing data optically and an embedded con- troller with a SCSI interface. Central Processing Unit (CPU) The part of a workstation that interprets and executes instructions. child directory See subdirectory . click To press and release a mouse but- ton. The term comes from the fact that pressing and releasing most mouse but- tons makes a clicking sound. cluster A group of workstations con- nected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server, per- forms as a file-system server for the clus- ter clients. See also cluster client, cluster node , cluster server . cluster client A cluster node that does not have a local HP-UX file system. Its file system resides on the cluster server. See also cluster , cluster node , cluster server . cluster node A member of a group of workstations connected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server, performs as a server to the cluster. See also cluster , cluster client , cluster server . cluster server A workstation that pro- vides file access, login access, file trans- fer, printing, and other services across a network to a defined cluster of systems (cluster nodes) connected via a LAN. See also cluster , cluster client , cluster node , host . command An instruction that you enter into the system at a prompt, to execute a program or perform a task. See also shell command . command argument Information you provide on a command line to describe the object (usually a file or directory) to be operated on by the command. command interpreter A program that reads lines of text from standard input (typed at the keyboard or read from a file) and interprets them as requests to execute other programs. An HP-UX command interpreter is called a shell. See also shell . command option Information you pro- vide on a command line to indicate any special action you want the command to take. See also default . configuration The arrangement of a workstation or network as defined by the nature, number, and chief characteristics of its functional units. More specifically, the term configuration may refer to a hardware configuration or a software configuration. control key sequence A keystroke combination used as a shorthand way of specifying commands. To enter a control key sequence, you hold down the control
Glossary 21 1 key while pressing another key. cpu See Central Processing Unit . CRX color graphics Expanded graph- ics capability offering 24-plane color, 24-plane Z-buffered color, or 48-plane Z-buffered color capability. current directory See current work- ing directory . current session The work and process- es that have been created since you logged into the system (and before you log out again). See also session. current working directory The direc- tory in which a relative path name search begins, as well as the directory in which you are currently working. It is also called the working directory or current directory. cursor The small blinking box dis- played in whatever screen is active at a particular time. The cursor marks your current typing position on the screen and indicates which program (HP VUE ter- minal window or shell) will receive your commands. daisy-chaining A method of connect- ing devices where the signal passes from one device to the next in serial fashion along a bus. DDS tape drive A device that stores data on Digital Data Storage (DDS) cas- settes. default Most commands give you a choice of one or more options. If you donât specify an option, the command automatically assigns one. This automat- ic option is called the default. See also command option . dialog box A special type of HP VUE screen that is called by the user from a window. Dialog boxes contain controls and settings. To display an example of a dialog box, click the Style Manager but- ton on the Workspace, then click on Col- or. directory A special type of object that contains information about the objects beneath it in the HP-UX organizational structure. Basically, it is a file that stores names and links to files and other direc- tories. See also file. disk A thin, round plate with a magnetic surface coating on which data is stored by magnetic recording. See also floppy diskette , hard disk , CD-ROM disc . disked workstation A workstation that has its own hard disk drive. See also diskless workstation , node , partner node , workstation . diskette See floppy diskette . diskless booting Loading the operating system into local memory from the disk of a partner workstation. diskless workstation A workstation that has no disk. A diskless workstation can use the disk of its partner worksta- tion or other workstations. If necessary, it can also use the computational services of the partner workstation or other work-
212 Glossary stations. A diskless workstation boots from its partner workstation. See also disked workstation , node , partner node , workstation . double click To press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. drag To press and hold down a mouse button while moving the mouse (and the pointer on the screen). See also drop. drive See CD-ROM drive , DDS tape drive , floppy drive , hard disk drive . drop To release an icon that has been âdraggedâ to a new position. See also drag . EISA (Extended Industry Standard Architecture) An industry standard bus architecture based on and compatible with that used by IBM in their AT series computers. environment The conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory, and default search paths. See also environ- ment variables . environment variables The set of de- fined shell variables (some of which are PATH, TERM, SHELL, EXINIT, HOME) that define the conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory, and default search paths. See also environ- ment . ETHERNET The LAN developed jointly by Digital Equipment Corpora- tion, Intel, and Xerox Corporation, upon which the IEEE 802.3 network is based. fast, differential SCSI An 8-bit wide bus with high-power receivers and driv- ers, which allows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 10 MB per second. See also fast-wide differential SCSI , single-ended standard SCSI , Small Computer System Interface, ul- tra, wide, single-ended SCSI . fast-wide differential SCSI A 16-bit wide bus with high-power receivers and drivers, which allows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 20 MB per second. See also fast, differen- tial SCSI , single-ended standard SC- SI , Small Computer System Interface, ultra, wide, single-ended SCSI . file The basic named unit of data stored on disk. See also directory, filename. file access permissions The access rights given to a particular file or directo- ry. Every file and directory has a set of access permissions, a code that deter- mines whether a process can perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening the file or writing to it). See also access permissions . File Manager The HP VUE application that allows you to manage your files and directories, and to set viewing preferenc- es. filename The name given to a particular file. See also absolute pathname , file , pathname .
Glossary 213 file server A workstation whose prima- ry task is to control the storage and re- trieval of data from hard disks. Any number of other workstations can be linked to the file server in order to use it to access data. file system The organized set of files and directories on a hard disk. firmware The control software that is embedded in ROM and is always resi- dent despite the status of the operating system. It handles the booting of the sys- tem, initialization of I/O, and starts the loading of the operating system. floppy diskette A thin, record-shaped plate that stores data on its magnetic sur- faces. The system uses heads (similar to heads in tape recorders) to read and write data on concentric disk tracks. floppy drive A device that stores data on a flexible diskette. hard disk A type of disk that is rigid as opposed to a floppy diskette, which is flexible. hard disk drive A device that stores data on a hard disk. The hard disk is a permanent part of the drive and cannot be removed. HCRX color graphics Accelerated 8- plane or 24-plane graphics. See also CRX color graphics . Help Manager The HP VUE applica- tion that provides online help. $HOME The environment variable rep- resenting the home directory. This is the directory in which you are placed after you log in. Typically, this is /users/ login , where login is your username. See also home directory . home directory A shorthand way of re- ferring to a frequently used directory, al- most always the login directory. host See cluster server . host name See internet protocol ad- dress . HP-UX cluster See cluster node , clus- ter server . HP Visual User Environment A user interface that draws a graphical layer over the complexities of the other layers of the system (the hardware, operating system, and X Window system), en- abling you to control your workstation by directly manipulating graphical ob- jects instead of by typing commands at a command-line prompt. HP VUE See HP Visual User Envi- ronment . icon A small, graphic representation of an object. Objects can be âiconizedâ (turned into icons) to clear a cluttered workspace. Icons can be restored to their original appearance when needed. What- ever processes are executing in an object continue to execute when the object is iconized. iconify See iconize .
214 Glossary iconize To turn a window or shell into an icon. See also icon. Initial System Loader The program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. input device Any of several pieces of hardware equipment used to give infor- mation to a system. Examples are the keyboard and the mouse. See also out- put device . input window The window that dis- plays a programâs prompt and any com- mands typed but not yet executed. internet protocol address (IP ad- dress) A string of characters that uniquely identifies a workstation in a network. Also referred to as the IP ad- dress, the system name, and the host name. invisible filename A filename in which the first character is a dot (.). Invisible filenames are not displayed by the listing commands such as ls and ll without add options, such as -a. IP address See internet protocol ad- dress . ISL See Initial System Loader . kernel The part of the operating system that is an executable piece of code re- sponsible for managing the computerâs resources. The kernel controls the rest of the operating system. LAN See local area network . LAN station address See local area network station address . link n. A special object that contains the name of another object. When you spec- ify a link as a pathname or part of a path- name, the system substitutes the pathname that the link contains. v. To join together two or more objects. local area network (LAN) A data communications system that allows a number of independent devices to com- municate with each other. The systems and clusters that share data, hardware, and software resources via Networking Services software. local area network system address The label that uniquely identifies the lo- cal area network (LAN) connection for your workstation at the hardware level. log in To initially sign on to the system so that you may begin to use it. This cre- ates your first user process. See also username . login directory The directory in which you are placed when you log in, usually your home directory. See also home di- rectory . Login Manager The program that con- trols the initial startup of HP VUE and accepts the userâs username and pass- word. login script The shell program that runs at each login, and sets the login environ- ment for your system.
Glossary 215 menu bar An area at the top or bottom of a window that contain the titles of the pull-down or pop-up menus for that ap- plication. minimize button In HP VUE, a push button on the window frame that turns a screen into an icon. See also icon, iconize . mouse pointer See pointer . name A character string associated with a file, directory, or link. A name can in- clude various alphanumeric characters, but never a slash (/) or null character. See also pathname . network Two or more workstations sharing information. See also cluster, workstation . network controller A printed circuit board that passes bit streams between the network and the main memory of the workstation. Coupled with the network transceiver, the controller also handles signal processing, encoding, and net- work media access. node A network computer (worksta- tion). Each node in the network can use the data, programs, and devices of other network nodes. Each node contains main memory and has its own disk or shares one with another node. See also disked workstation , diskless workstation , workstation . node name A unique identifying name given to a workstation in a cluster. See also cluster , node . nonvolatile memory System memory that retains its contents even after work- station power is turned off. object Any file, directory, or link in the network. See also directory , file , link , pathname . operating system The program that su- pervises the execution of other programs on your workstation. For example, the entire HP-UX system, including the ker- nel and all HP-UX commands. See also kernel . option See command option . output device Any of several pieces of hardware used for receiving messages from the workstation. Display screens and printers are examples of output de- vices. See also input device. output window The window that dis- plays a process response to your com- mand. parent directory A directory that con- tains other directories, each of which is then called a subdirectory. See also sub- directory . partner node A workstation that shares its disk with a diskless node. See also diskless workstation . password The word you enter next to the password prompt at login time. Keep your password secret and change it occa- sionally in order to protect your account from unauthorized use. See also user ac- count .
216 Glossary path The hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. pathname A series of names separated by slashes that describe the path of the operating system from some starting point in the network to a destination ob- ject. Pathnames begin with the name of the starting point, and include every di- rectory name between the starting point and the destination object. A pathname ends with the name of the destination ob- ject. See also name, object . permissions A set of rights (read, write, execute) associated with an object in the file system. Determines who may use the object. PID Process Identification. Also re- ferred to as a process ID. See also pro- cess ID . pointer Sometimes called the âmouse pointer,â the pointer shows the mouse lo- cation on the screen. The pointerâs shape depends on its location. In the HP VUE Workspace, the pointer is an X. On a window frame, the pointer is an arrow. process A computing environment in which you may execute programs; a pro- gram currently running in the system. process ID A unique identification number assigned to all processes by the operating system. Also referred to as a PID. See also PID. program A unit of executable code, in binary or âsourceâ form. Most HP-UX commands and routines consist of pro- grams. prompt A message or symbol displayed by the system to let you know that it is ready for your input. push button A graphic control that simulates a real-life push button. Use the pointer and mouse to push the button and immediately start an action. RAM Random access memory. ROM Read-only memory. root See superuser . scroll bar A vertical or horizontal bar located on the side or bottom of a win- dow that allows the user to view infor- mation that does not fit within the window. SCSI See Small Computer System In- terface . server A program that controls all ac- cess to input and output devices. session The time between when you log in and when you log out. Also called a work session or a login session. See also current session . shell A command-line interpreter pro- gram used to invoke utility programs. Some examples of HP-UX shells are the Bourne, Korn, Key, and C shells. Some- times referred to as a command interpret- er. See also command interpreter . shell command An instruction you
Glossary 217 give the system to execute a utility pro- gram or shell script. See also shell script , utility program . shell script A file that contains com- mands that the system can interpret and run in a shell. shutdown The process of taking the system from multi-user state to system administration state. SIMM See Single In-line Memory Module . single-ended standard SCSI An 8-bit wide SCSI bus with standard receivers and drivers, which limits total cable length to 6 meters. See also fast, differ- ential SCSI , fast-wide, differential SC- SI , Small Computer System Interface, ultra, wide, single-ended SCSI . Single In-line Memory Module A memory board. slider One of the components of a scroll bar. The slider is the object that is dragged along the scroll area to cause a change. Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) An IEEE standard for interfac- ing a computer to multiple, disparate high-speed peripherals such as a floppy disk or a CD-ROM, singly or in combi- nation. See also fast, differential SCSI , fast-wide SCSI , single-ended standard SCSI . standalone A workstation that is not part of a cluster. See also cluster. Style Manager The HP VUE applica- tion that provides the ability to custom- ize various aspects of your system, including colors, fonts, the keyboard, the mouse, session startup and termination behavior, and access to other worksta- tions. subdirectory A directory that is located in, or anywhere on a path below, another directory. The directory above the subdi- rectory is called the parent directory. The subdirectory is also referred to as the child directory. See also parent directo- ry . superuser A user with permission to enter the top-level directory and make changes to files and programs that users are not allowed to change. To âbecome superuserâ or âbecome rootâ means to let the system know that you are now as- suming the role of system administrator. You can do this either by logging into the system as root, or by typing su at a com- mand-line prompt. You must know the root password to become root . system administrator The person re- sponsible for system and network instal- lation, updating, maintenance, and security at your site. system call Invocation of a kernel pro- cess by a user program. system name See internet protocol address . terminal window A terminal window is a type of HP VUE window that emu- lates a complete display terminal. Termi- nal windows are typically used to fool
218 Glossary non-client programs into believing they are running in their favorite terminal. When not running programs or execut- ing operating system commands, termi- nal windows display the command-line prompt. See also HP Visual User Envi- ronment . title bar The rectangular area between the top of the window and the window frame, that contains the title of the win- dow object. transceiver A device that transmits and receives signals. ultra, wide, single-ended SCSI A 16- bit wide bus with standard receivers and drivers, which limits cable lengths to a total of 3 meters. See also fast wide dif- ferential SCSI, Small Computer Sys- tem Interface . user account The system administrator defines a user account for every person authorized to use the system. Each user account contains the name the computer uses to identify the person (user ID), and the personâs password. User accounts also contain project and organization names, to help the system determine who can use the system and what resources each person or organization can use. See also user ID , password . user ID The name the computer uses to identify you. Your system administrator assigns you a user ID. Enter your user ID during the login procedure when the sys- tem displays the login prompt. See also user account . username The name that the system recognizes as uniquely yours. Also known as your login name. The user- name is also the name that identifies you to the mail system and other software re- quiring secure entry. utility See utility program . utility program A program provided with the operating system to perform a frequently required task, such as printing a file or displaying the contents of a di- rectory. See also command, shell com- mand . window A rectangular area of the screen for viewing information. HP VUE allows you to create several types of win- dows on the screen. Each window is a separate computing environment in which you may execute programs, edit text, or read text. See also Workspace Manager . Window Manager The HP VUE pro- gram that controls the size, placement, and operation of windows. working directory See current work- ing directory . Workspace What the screen becomes when you start HP VUE. Although you can hide the workspace under terminal windows or other graphic objects, you can never position anything behind the workspace. All windows and graphic ob- jects appear stacked on the workspace. See also HP Visual User Environment , terminal window . Workspace Manager The program that controls the size, placement, and op-
Glossary 219 eration of windows on the HP VUE Workspace. The Workspace Manager is a special Window Manager. See also Window Manager . workstation A compact, graphics-ori- ented computer having high speed and high memory capacity. A workstation usually includes a keyboard, a monitor, and a system unit. See also node, disked workstation , diskless workstation.
220 Glossary
Index 221 Symbols $HOME,, 213 A absolute pathname,, 209 access permissions,, 209 active window,, 209 ANSI,, 209 archiving data listing files,, 56 restoring files,, 56 saving to a cassette,, 55 archiving data,, 55 argument,, 209 attachment unit interface (AUI),, 209 audio CODEC, 16 features, 15 headphone jack, 7 IN,, 14 input, 15 microphone jack, 7 mute button, 7 OUT,, 14 outpu, 15 volume control, 7 auto boot,, 199 auto boot, changing state,, 199 auto search,, 199 auto search, changing state,, 199 auto-negotiation failure, 75 B back up,, 209 bitmap,, 209 boot console accessing,, 182 features,, 177 menus,, 177 boot console interface,, 209 boot failure dealing with, 83 boot ROM,, 209 boot,, 209 bootable media searching for,, 185 bootstrap service,, 209 byte,, 209 C CD-ROM disc busy light during self test,, 39 mounting and unmounting,, 36 mounting using SAM,, 36 unmounting using SAM,, 38 CD-ROM disc,, 209 CD-ROM discs caring for,, 28 CD-ROM drive controls and features, 8 controls and features,, 25 description,, 25 troubleshooting,, 41 verifying operation,, 35 CD-ROM drive,, 210 CD-ROM media,, 28 CD-ROM,, 209 Central Processing Unit (CPU),, 210 child directory,, 210 click,, 210 cluster client,, 210 cluster node,, 210 cluster server,, 210 cluster,, 210 command argument,, 210 command interpreter,, 210 command option,, 210 command,, 210 commands all,, 206 auto,, 199 boot,, 183 cd,, 66 eisa,, 198 fastboot,, 202, 204, 205 lanaddress,, 203 mediainit,, 65 memory,, 195 path,, 187 pim,, 207 reset,, 186 search,, 185 tar,, 55 configuration,, 210 control key sequence,, 210 controls, power LED, 6 controls, system unit, 5â12 audio, 7 LEDs, 6 power switch, 5 storage device, 8 cpu,, 211 CRX color graphics,, 211 current directory,, 211 current working directory,, 211 cursor,, 211 D daisy-chaining,, 211 data cassettes cleaning heads,, 50 media life,, 49 media restrictions,, 50 ordering information,, 58 setting write-protect tab,, 51 DDS tape drive controls and indicators,, 10, 45 LED code warning conditions high humidity,, 48 media wear,, 48 selft-test,, 48 LED codes,, 47 loading and unloading data cassette,, 52 troubleshooting,, 58 using device files,, 54, 64 verifying operation,, 53 DDS tape drive,, 211 DDS tape drives operating,, 52 default,, 211 devices boot failures and, 83 dialog box,, 211 directory,, 211 disk,, 211 disked workstation,, 211 diskette,, 211 diskettes ordering information,, 70 diskless booting,, 211 diskless workstation,, 211 documentation conventions, xvi
222 Index double click,, 212 drag,, 212 drive,, 212 drop,, 212 E EISA option board installing,, 136 EISA slots displaying status,, 198 EISA,, 212 electrostatic discharge (ESD) precatuions,, 94 emissions regulations Federal Communications Commission (FCC),, 92 third party compliance,, 93 environment variables,, 212 environment,, 212 ETHERNET,, 212 F fast, differential SCSI,, 212 fastboot disabling,, 202 displaying status,, 202, 204 enabling,, 202 fastboot,, 202 fast-wide SCSI,, 212 file access permissions,, 212 File Manager,, 212 file server,, 213 file system,, 213 file,, 212 filename,, 212 floor stand, removing,, 103 floppy disk drive controls and features, 12 floppy diskette formatting,, 65 inserting and removing,, 62 listing files,, 67 restoring files from,, 66 saving files to,, 66 setting write-protect,, 61 transferring data,, 66 floppy diskette,, 213 floppy drive operating,, 63 verifying configuration,, 63 floppy drive,, 213 floppy driver configuring,, 69 G GSC option board installing,, 136 H hard disk drive configuring,, 120 hard disk drive,, 213 hard disk,, 213 HCRX color graphics,, 213 Help Manager,, 213 home directory,, 213 host name,, 213 host,, 213 HP Visual User Environment,, 213 HP VUE,, 213 HP-UX cluster,, 213 I icon,, 213 iconify,, 213 iconize,, 214 Initial System Loader,, 214 input device,, 214 input window,, 214 internal storage configuring, 106 internet protocol address,, 214 invisible filename,, 214 IP address,, 214 ISL,, 214 K kernel,, 214 keyboard PS2, 17 L LAN auto-negotiation, 204 cabling, 75 setting, 204 settings, 75 LAN station address,, 203, 214 LAN station address,displaying,, 203 LAN,, 214 link,, 214 local area network system address,, 214 local area network,, 214 log in,, 214 login directory,, 214 Login Manager,, 214 login script,, 214 M main tray assembly removing,, 122 replacing,, 124 memory displaying configuration,, 195 installing additional,, 126 nonvolatile,, 199 menu bar,, 215 minimize button,, 215 monitor, 20 changing type,, 148 displaying type,, 189, 190 setting type at power on, 193 setting type at power on,, 148 setting type from boot console,, 148 setting type,, 191 mouse pointer,, 215 N name,, 215 network auto-negotiation failure, 75 network controller,, 215 network,, 215 node name,, 215 node,, 215 nonvolatile memory,, 199, 215 O object,, 215 operating system, 22 operating system,, 215 option,, 215 ordering information cleaning cassettes,, 58
Index 223 data cassettes,, 58 diskettes,, 70 output device,, 215 output window,, 215 P parent directory,, 215 partner node,, 215 password,, 215 path displaying,, 187 setting,, 188 path,, 187, 216 pathname,, 216 permissions,, 216 PID,, 216 PIM information,displaying,, 207 pointer,, 216 pointing devices, 21 problems 802.3 network,, 75 loading and booting the operating sys- tem,, 74 system power up,, 73 using CD-ROM drive,, 77 using DDS tape drive,, 78 using floppy disk drive,, 79 using hard disk drive,, 76 problems, questions, and suggestions, xvii process ID,, 216 process,, 216 Processor performance,, 3 program,, 216 prompt,, 216 push button,, 216 R RAM,, 216 rear panel connectors, system unit, 13â19, ??â19 audio, 14, 15 network, 17 parallel I/O, 17 power cord, 19 RS-232 serial I/O, 18 SCSI, 19 TOC, 19 regulations acoustics,, 94 laser safety statement,, 96 safety statement,, 95 related manuals, xv release documents, xiv revision history, xv ROM,, 216 root,, 216 S scroll bar,, 216 SCSI bus differences,, 153 fast, wide differential SCSI-3 length,, 163, 165 fast, wide differential,, 153 single-ended SCSI-2 length,, 161 single-ended,, 153 SCSI device IDs assigning,, 167 fast, wide differential,, 170, 171 single-ended standard system,, 168 SCSI ports connecting to,, 172 SCSI restrictions cables,, 156 configuration constraints,, 159 connectors and terminators,, 158 fast, wide differential SCSI-3 configura- tion constraints,, 160 SCSI,, 216 SCSI, checking the ID,, 101 server,, 216 session,, 216 shell command,, 216 shell script,, 217 shell,, 216 shutdown,, 217 SIMM,, 217 Single In-line Memory Module,, 217 single-ended standard SCSI,, 217 slider,, 217 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI),, 217 standalone,, 217 storage device CD-ROM, 8 floppy disk, 12 storage devices installing,, 105 Style Manager,, 217 subdirectory,, 217 superuser,, 217 system administrator,, 217 system call,, 217 system information,displaying,, 206 system name,, 217 system verification tests running, 84 T tar command, additional information,, 57 terminal window,, 217 tests running system verification, 84 title bar,, 218 transceiver,, 218 U user account,, 218 user ID,, 218 username,, 218 utility program,, 218 utility,, 218 W warnings and cautions,, 97 Window Manager,, 218 window,, 218 working directory,, 218 Workspace Manager,, 218 Workspace,, 218 workstation booting,, 183 features,, 3 preparing to change configuration,, 103 resetting to predefined parameters, 186 resetting,, 186 Workstation,, 219
224 Index